Series: Setup Manual

MXG53GB
Customizable Vision System
XG-X Series
Setup Manual
(Area Camera Edition)
Read this manual before use.
Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
XG-X SM(Area)-GB 1
Introduction
Introduction
This manual describes the setup procedures required for connections and initial installation of the XG-X Series (hereafter
referred to in this manual as "the controller"), as well as related information and product specifications. Read this manual
thoroughly in order to understand how the controller works and to maximize the performance of the controller.
This manual applies to the XG-X Series. However, unless otherwise specified, the description in this manual basically
refers to the XG-X2700/X2702. For differences in specifications depending on the model, refer to the "XG-X Series User's
Manual".
Always keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
Please ensure that the manual is passed to the end user of the software.
Symbols
The following warning symbols are used to ensure safety and to prevent human injury and/or damage to property when
using the system.
DANGER Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product damage as well as property damage.
Important Indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.
Point Indicates additional information on proper operation.
Reference Indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.
Trademarks
• Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
• "SD Memory Card" is a registered trademark of the SD Association.
• EtherCAT® is a patented technology and registered trademark licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Germany.
• Other company names and product names noted in this document are registered trademarks or trademarks of their
respective companies. The ™ mark and ® mark have been omitted in this manual.
2 XG-X SM(Area)-GB
Introduction
This manual and related manuals

This manual describes the setup procedures required for connections and initial installation of the XG-X Series (hereafter
referred to in this manual as "the controller"), as well as related information and product specifications. Read this manual
thoroughly in order to understand how the controller works and to maximize the performance of the controller.
Always keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
Please ensure that the manual is passed to the end user of the software.
Initial installation
XG-X Series System Connection/Preparation for Initial Installation/Information of Product Specifications
Camera External XG-X Series Setup

device
Manual (this manual)
Controller
Inspection program development/Support functions for Inspection program development

Inspection program development
Creating the inspection XG-X VisionEditor

settings and setting the
controller by XG-X VisionEditor
Reference Manual
Controller
Creating the inspection

settings and setting the XG-X Series
controller by functions built User's Manual
into the controller
Controller
Creating GUI/Tool simulation

Support tool for operation
XG-X VisionEditor
Operation methods of
Reference Manual
tools by XG-X VisionEditor
Controller
Operation methods of XG-X Series

tools by functions built
into the controller
User's Manual
Controller
Communication and control with external equipment

Communication control/external monitoring
External terminals
PLC-Link XG-X Series
CC-Link
EtherNet/IPTM Communications
External
device Control Manual
ActiveX PROFINET
EtherCAT XG-X ActiveX Control
control FTP
Controller Reference Manual
No protocol
communication
Remote monitoring of operation condition

XG-X VisionTerminal
User's Manual
Controller
16868GB XG-X SM(Area)-GB 3

Safety information for XG-X Series
Safety Precautions
• Do not use this product for the purpose to protect a human body or a part of human body.
• This product is not intended for use as explosion-proof product. Do not use this product in a hazardous
location and/or potentially explosive atmosphere.
DANGER • Do not use this product in an application that may cause death, serious injury or serious property damage
due to a failure with this product should occur, such as nuclear power plants, on aircraft, trains, ships, or
vehicles, used within medical equipment, playground equipment, roller coasters and other rides, etc.
You must perform a sufficient risk assessment for the machine where this product is to be installed prior to
WARNING installing this product. Provide appropriate protective fail-safe measures on the machine independent from this
product in case a failure with this product should occur.
You must verify that this product is operating correctly in terms of functionality and performance before the
CAUTION start and the operation of this product.
• If the system is operated beyond its published specifications or if the system is modified, its functions and
performance cannot be guaranteed.
• When this product is used in combination with other instruments, functions and performance may be
NOTICE degraded, depending on the operating conditions and surrounding environment.
• Do not subject the controller or connected devices to a sudden change in temperature. There is the risk of
condensation occurring.
General cautions for the controller
• Do not use with any power voltage other than 24 VDC. Doing so may cause fire, electric shock, or product
WARNING malfunction.
• Do not disassemble or modify the unit. Doing so may cause fire or electric shock.
Operating environment and conditions
To use the system properly and safely, avoid installing this unit in the following locations. Doing so may cause
fire, electric shock, or product malfunction.
• Locations that contain moisture or dust, or that are poorly ventilated.
• Locations where the system is exposed to direct sunlight or temperature increases.
CAUTION
• Locations where there are flammable or corrosive gases.
• Locations where the unit may be directly subjected to vibration or impact.
• Locations where water, oil or chemicals may splash onto the unit.
• Locations where static electricity is present or electric discharge may occur.
• Keep this unit and cables away from high-tension cables and power lines. Otherwise, noise may cause
malfunction or accidents.
• Bundle cables with the camera cable protector (OP-88208) or protective material like spiral tubing. Direct
NOTICE bundling will concentrate the cable load on the bindings, which can result in cable damage or a short circuit.
• The controller and optional devices are precision components. To maintain performance, do not subject
them to vibration or shock.
Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs
In the following cases, turn the power OFF immediately. Using the unit in an abnormal condition may cause fire,
electric shock, or product malfunction. Contact your local Keyence office for repair.
CAUTION • If water or debris enters the system
• If the system is dropped or the case is damaged
• If smoke or a burning smell emits from the controller
4 XG-X SM(Area)-GB
Usage
• Before making any connections/disconnections, be sure to turn off the power of this unit and connected
devices. Failure to do so may result in a malfunction of the controller or connected devices.
• Do not turn the power off while you are programming. Otherwise, all or part of the program settings may be
NOTICE lost.
• Do not block the ventilation holes. Otherwise, the inside temperature may rise and a malfunction may occur.
• Do not allow an excessive amount of sunlight or bright indoor light to enter the camera for a long period of
time. Doing so may cause damage to the CCD inside the camera.
Maintenance
• Do not clean with benzene, thinner, or alcohol. Doing so may cause discoloration or deformation of the unit.
NOTICE • If the unit has any dirt on it, wipe it off with a cloth moistened with a mild detergent, then wipe with a dry cloth.
Precautions on Regulations and Standards
CE and UKCA Markings

Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of the applicable EU Directive(s) and UK
regulations, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product in the Member
States of European Union and in the United Kingdom.
EMC Directive (CE) and Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations (UKCA)

• Applicable standard (BS)EN61326-1, Class A
• This product is intended to be used in an industrial environment.
• Use cables shorter than or equal to 30 m to connect this product and its external devices.
• Be sure to connect the ground terminal to a grounding.
• When connecting the CC-Link unit CA-NCL20E, attach a ferrite core (OP-84364, optional) within 300 mm on the CA-
NCL20E side of the CC-Link dedicated cable.
Remarks: These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated complies
with the essential requirements of EMC Directive and Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations. The manufacturer of the
end-product is solely responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive and
Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations.
FCC Regulations
This product complies with the following regulations specified by the FCC.
• Applicable regulation FCC Part 15 Subpart B ClassA
• This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
• FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
KC mark (Republic of Korea)
사 용 자 안 내 문
이 기기는 업무용 환경에서 사용할 목적으로 적합성평가를 받은 기기로서
가정용 환경에서 사용하 는 경우 전파간섭의 우려가 있습니다.
XG-X SM(Area)-GB 5
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Introduction ................................................................. 2 Chapter 4 Checking the Wiring and

This manual and related manuals ............................. 3 Adjusting the Camera
Safety information for XG-X Series ............................. 4
Starting Up the Controller ........................................ 4-2
Safety Precautions .................................................... 4
Check that a Screen is Displayed on the Monitor .. 4-2
Precautions on Regulations and Standards ............. 5
Switching between Run Mode and Setup Mode .... 4-3
Table of Contents ........................................................ 6
Checking the Wiring ................................................. 4-4
Checking the Input Signal ...................................... 4-4
Chapter 1 Before Setting Up
Checking the Output Signal ................................... 4-5
Standard System Configuration ...............................1-2 Adjusting the Camera .............................................. 4-6
Identifying Controls and Connectors ......................1-10 Enabling Light ........................................................ 4-6
Controller ............................................................. 1-10 Adjusting Brightness and Focus ............................ 4-7
Adjusting the Lens ................................................. 4-8
Chapter 2 Installing and In the Case that an Error Message is Displayed ... 4-9
Connecting the Device
Installing the Controller ............................................2-2 Chapter 5 I/O Interface
Caution on Direction of Controller Mounting .......... 2-2 Overview of the I/O Interface ................................... 5-1
Be careful in regard to cooling the unit in RS-232C Interface ................................................... 5-2
the installation site ........................................... 2-2 RS-232C Port Specifications ................................. 5-2
Installing the Expansion Unit ................................. 2-3 Connecting to a PC ................................................ 5-2
Fixing the Controller ............................................... 2-5 Ethernet Interface .................................................... 5-3
Installing the Camera ...............................................2-6 Ethernet Port Specifications .................................. 5-3
Selecting the Lens ...................................................2-7 USB Interface ........................................................... 5-4
Confirm the Working Distance from USB Port Specifications ......................................... 5-4
the FOV Chart. ................................................. 2-7 Connecting to a PC ................................................ 5-4
Using the Close-up Rings ...................................... 2-8 CC-Link Interface ..................................................... 5-6
Looking up the FOV for the macro lens ................. 2-8
CA-NCL20E CC-Link Specifications ...................... 5-6
Connecting Cables ...................................................2-9 Connecting to the CC-Link ..................................... 5-7
Selection and Installation of LED Lighting ..............2-12 CC-Link Unit (CA-NCL20E: option) ....................... 5-8
Selecting the Correct Lighting System ................. 2-12 EtherCAT Interface .................................................. 5-9
Using the Illumination Expansion Unit ................. 2-15 CA-NEC20E EtherCAT Specifications ................... 5-9
Points To Note When Installing a LumiTrax Light/ Connecting to EtherCAT Network .......................... 5-9
Camera System ............................................. 2-17 EtherCAT Unit (CA-NEC20E: option) .................. 5-10
Points to Note When Installing a 3D Capture Mode, EtherNet/IP Interface ............................................. 5-11
Profile Capture Mode/Camera System .......... 2-19
CA-NEP20E EtherNet/IP Specifications .............. 5-11
Connecting to EtherNet/IP Network ..................... 5-11
Chapter 3 I/O Wiring EtherNet/IP Unit (CA-NEP20E: option) ................ 5-12
Overview ..................................................................3-2 PROFINET Interface .............................................. 5-13
Trigger 1 Input ..........................................................3-3 CA-NPN20E PROFINET Specifications .............. 5-13
Permission Output for Trigger 1 Input ......................3-4 Connecting to PROFINET Network ..................... 5-13
Error Output and Run Mode Output .........................3-5 PROFINET Unit (CA-NPN20E: option) ................ 5-14
Total Status Output and Strobe Output ....................3-6 Parallel I/O Interface .............................................. 5-16
Timing Chart .............................................................3-7 Connector Specifications ..................................... 5-16
Setting the Status Change Time and Output Time ..3-8 Pin Layout: Cable colors when optional
OP-51657 is used. ......................................... 5-16
Terminal Block Interface ........................................ 5-18
6 XG-X SM(Area)-GB
Table of Contents
Standard Specifications ....................................... 5-18 High-speed 21 megapixel camera

Pin Layout ............................................................ 5-19 (CA-HF2100C/HF2100M) .............................. 6-20
Expansion Unit .......................................................5-20 64 megapixel camera (CA-HF6400C/HF6400M) . 6-22
Illumination Expansion Unit High-speed, small 0.31 megapixel camera
(CA-DC40E : Option) ..................................... 5-20 (CA-HS035C/HS035M)/Ultra small
Illumination Expansion Unit 0.31 megapixel camera
(CA-DC50E : Option) ..................................... 5-22 (XG-S035C/S035M) ....................................... 6-24
Illumination Expansion Unit High-speed, small 2 megapixel camera
(CA-DC60E : Option) ..................................... 5-24 (CA-HS200C/HS200M) .................................. 6-25
Input/Output Circuit ................................................5-26 2 megapixel camera (CA-HX200C/HX200M) ...... 6-26
Input Connections ................................................ 5-26 5 megapixel camera (CA-HX500C/HX500M) ...... 6-27
Output Connections ............................................. 5-27 0.31 megapixel camera (XG-035C/035M) /

High-speed, 0.31 megapixel camera
Chapter 6 Specifications and (XG-H035C/H035M) ...................................... 6-28
Optional Devices 2 megapixel camera (XG-200C/200M) /

High-speed, 2 megapixel camera
Cameras and Connectable Camera Input Unit ........6-2
(XG-H200C/H200M) ...................................... 6-29
List of maximum cable lengths by camera ...............6-3 Small 2 megapixel camera
List of Cable Characteristics ....................................6-4 (XG-S200C/XG-S200M) ................................ 6-32
Examples of Cable Connection Between the Main Specifications ................................................ 6-33
Controller and a Camera ....................................6-5 Controller Unit
Connection Examples (XG-X2900/X2902/X2800/X2802/X2700/X2702/
(When the CA-CH** Cable is Used) ................ 6-5 X2500/X2502/X2200/X2202/X2000/X2002) ... 6-33
Connection Examples Controller Unit (XG-X1500/X1502/X1200/X1202/
(When the CA-CN** Cable is Used) ................ 6-7 X1000/X1002) ................................................ 6-36
Field of View and the Working Distance by Camera Illumination Expansion Unit (CA-DC40E) ............ 6-38
(FOV Chart) ........................................................6-9 Illumination Expansion Unit (CA-DC50E) ............ 6-38
List of FOV Charts by Camera ............................... 6-9 Illumination Expansion Unit (CA-DC60E) ............ 6-39
Environment resistant 0.35 megapixel camera Area Camera Input Unit (CA-E100) ..................... 6-39
(CA-035C/035M) /High-speed, environment Area Camera Input Unit (CA-E200) ..................... 6-39
resistant 0.35 megapixel camera High-Speed Line Scan Camera Input Unit
(CA-H035C/H035M) ...................................... 6-10 (CA-E200L) .................................................... 6-40
Environment resistant 2 megapixel camera CC-Link Unit (CA-NCL20E) ................................ 6-40
(CA-200C/200M) /High-speed, environment EtherCAT Unit (CA-NEC20E) .............................. 6-40
resistant 2 megapixel camera EtherNet/IP Unit (CA-NEP20E) ........................... 6-41
(CA-H200C/H200M) ...................................... 6-11 PROFINET Unit (CA-NPN20E) ............................ 6-41
High-speed, high-functioning 0.47 megapixel Cameras (CA-035C/035M) .................................. 6-41
camera (CA-H048CX/H048MX) / Cameras (CA-200C/200M) .................................. 6-42
0.47 megapixel camera Cameras (CA-H035C/H035M) ............................. 6-42
(CA-HX048C/HX048M) .................................. 6-14 Cameras (CA-H048CX/H048MX) ........................ 6-43
High-speed, high-functioning 2 megapixel camera Cameras (CA-H200C/H200M) ............................. 6-43
(CA-H200CX/H200MX) .................................. 6-16 Cameras (CA-H200CX/H200MX) ........................ 6-44
High-speed, environment resistant 5 megapixel Cameras (CA-H500C/H500M) ............................. 6-44
camera (CA-H500C/H500M)/ Cameras (CA-H500CX/H500MX) ........................ 6-45
High-speed, 5 megapixel camera Cameras (CA-H2100C/H2100M,
(XG-H500C/H500M) ...................................... 6-17 XG-H2100C/H2100M) ................................... 6-45
High-speed, high-functioning 5 megapixel camera Cameras (CA-HS035C/HS035M) ........................ 6-46
(CA-H500CX/H500MX) .................................. 6-18 Cameras (CA-HS200C/HS200M) ........................ 6-46
21 megapixel camera (CA-H2100C/H2100M, Cameras (CA-HX048C/HX048M) ........................ 6-47
XG-H2100C/H2100M) ................................... 6-19 Cameras (CA-HX200C/HX200M) ........................ 6-47
XG-X SM(Area)-GB 7
Table of Contents
Cameras (CA-HX500C/HX500M) ........................ 6-48 Camera Cable Extension Repeater (CA-CNX10U)/

Cameras (CA-HF2100C/HF2100M) .................... 6-48 Camera Cable for the Repeater
Cameras (CA-HF6400C/HF6400M) .................... 6-49 (CA-CN** Series) ........................................... 6-86
Cameras (XG-035C/035M) .................................. 6-50 Options ................................................................... 6-87
Cameras (XG-200C/200M) .................................. 6-50 List of Options ...................................................... 6-87
Cameras (XG-H035C/H035M) ............................. 6-51 Standard Lenses .................................................. 6-96
Cameras (XG-H200C/H200M) ............................. 6-51 High-resolution Lenses ........................................ 6-99
Cameras (XG-H500C/H500M) ............................. 6-52 Vibration-resistant Lens with High Resolution
Cameras (XG-S035C/S035M) ............................. 6-52 and Low Distortion ....................................... 6-102
Cameras (XG-S200C/S200M) ............................. 6-53 IP64-compliant, Environment Resistant Lens
Camera Cables (CA-CH** Series) ....................... 6-54 with High Resolution and Low Distortion ..... 6-104
Camera Cables (CA-CF** Series) ....................... 6-54 Ultra High-resolution Lenses ............................. 6-107
Camera Cables (CA-CN** Series) ....................... 6-55 1-inch Lens ........................................................ 6-110
Camera Cable Extension Repeater 4/3"-compatible Ultra High-resolution
(CA-CHX10U/CNX10U) ................................. 6-56 C Mount Lens .............................................. 6-112
Camera Cable for the Repeater Extension Tube (OP-51612) .............................. 6-113
(CA-CH** Series) ........................................... 6-57 Various Lens Filters ........................................... 6-114
Camera Cable for the Repeater 2-inch Lens ........................................................ 6-115
(CA-CN** Series) ........................................... 6-57 2-inch High-resolution Lens ............................... 6-116
Dimensions ............................................................6-58 F-mount Conversion Adapter (OP-87319) ......... 6-117
Controller Unit (XG-X2900/X2902/X2800/X2802X2700/ C-mount Adapter (OP-88578) ............................ 6-117
X2702/X2500/X2502/X2200/X2202/X2000/X2002/ Telecentric Macro Lenses .................................. 6-118
X1500/X1502/X1200/X1202/X1000/X1002) ... 6-58 4/3" Compatible Variable Magnification
USB Handheld Controller (OP-87983) ................. 6-67 Telecentric Macro Lens ............................... 6-124
Dedicated Mouse (OP-87506) ............................. 6-67 4/3" Compatible, Telecentric Macro Lens .......... 6-125
Cameras (CA-035C/035M/200C/200M/H035C/ Ultra High-resolution Telecentric Macro Lens .... 6-126
H035M/H200C/H200M/H500C/H500M) ........ 6-68 Large-element-compatible Macro Lens ............. 6-129
Cameras (CA-H048CX/H048MX/HX048C/ Side View Mirror (OP-87895) ............................. 6-131
HX048M) ........................................................ 6-69 High-speed, small camera (CA-HS200C/HS200M) /
Cameras (CA-H200CX/H200MX/H500CX/H500MX/ Small Camera (XG-S200C/S200M)
HX200C/HX200M/HX500C/HX500M) ........... 6-70 Options ........................................................ 6-132
Cameras (CA-H2100C/H2100M, XG-H2100C/ High-speed, small camera (CA-HS035C/HS035M) /
H2100M) ........................................................ 6-71 Ultra Small Camera (XG-S035C/S035M)
Cameras (CA-HF2100C/M) ................................. 6-72 Options ........................................................ 6-133
Cameras (CA-HF6400C/M) ................................. 6-73 LED Lights ......................................................... 6-134
Cameras (CA-HS035C/HS035M) ........................ 6-74 C-mount Lens Adapter for Spot Lights
Cameras (CA-HS200C/HS200M) ........................ 6-75 (OP-87896) .................................................. 6-143
Cameras (XG-035C/035M) .................................. 6-76 LED Light Cable ................................................. 6-143
Cameras (XG-200C/200M) .................................. 6-77 IP67-compliant, Environment Resistant
Cameras (XG-H035C/H035M/H200C/H200M/ LED Light ..................................................... 6-144
H500C/H500M) .............................................. 6-78 LED Light Cable
Cameras (XG-S035C/S035M/S200C/S200M) ..... 6-79 (for CA-DRW13P/CA-DBW15P) .................. 6-146
Camera Cables (CA-CH** Series) ....................... 6-80 LumiTrax Light ................................................... 6-147
Camera Cables (CA-CF** Series) ....................... 6-82 LED Light Cable (dedicated for
Camera Cables (CA-CN** Series) ....................... 6-83 CA-DRW5X/DRW10X/DRW20X) ................. 6-149
Camera Cable Extension Repeater (CA-CHX10U)/ LumiTrax Light ................................................... 6-150
Camera Cable for the Repeater Coaxial Vertical Illumination for LumiTrax Specular
(CA-CH** Series) ........................................... 6-85 Reflection Mode ........................................... 6-151
MultiSpectrum Light ........................................... 6-152
8 XG-X SM(Area)-GB
Table of Contents
Dome Attachment Dedicated for

MultiSpectrum Light ..................................... 6-154
Polarization Filter Attachment Dedicated for
MultiSpectrum Light ..................................... 6-156
Pattern Projection Light ..................................... 6-158
Calibration Plate Dedicated for Pattern
Projection Light ............................................ 6-160
LED Light Cable
(for CA-DRM*X/CA-DXW10X/DQP*X) ........ 6-161
Power Cable (for CA-DQP25X/DQW40X) ......... 6-161
Ultracompact switching power supply
(CA-U4/U5) .................................................. 6-162
LCD Color Monitor (CA-MP82) .......................... 6-165
Touch Panel LCD Monitor (CA-MP120T)/
LCD Monitor (CA-MP120) ............................ 6-166
XY Stage for Camera ......................................... 6-168
Chapter 7 Appendix
Controlling the Handheld Controller (Optional) ........7-2
The Function for Each Button ................................ 7-2
Multiple Key Combinations .................................... 7-3
Inserting and Removing an SD Card .......................7-4
Inserting an SD Card ............................................. 7-4
Removing an SD Card ........................................... 7-5
Connecting and Disconnecting the USB HDD .........7-6
Connecting a USB HDD ........................................ 7-6
Removing a USB HDD .......................................... 7-7
Exporting and Importing Settings .............................7-8
Exporting Settings .................................................. 7-8
Importing Settings .................................................. 7-9
Saving Camera Images for Simulation ...................7-10
INDEX .......................................................................I-1
XG-X SM(Area)-GB 9
10 XG-X SM(Area)-GB
1
Chapter
Before Setting Up
Before Setting Up
Documentation for the installation and configuration methods

of the controller, software, and CAD data can be downloaded
from the following URL.
www.keyence.com/xgxus
XG-X SM(Area)-GB 1-1

Standard System Configuration

Before Setting Up
By combining various optional (sold separately) products, such as a camera, with the controller, this unit can support
many applications. Typical basic system configurations that use an area camera are introduced below.
Refer to "Chapter 6 Specifications and Optional Devices" (Page 6-1) for more details about the options which can be
Reference used with this controller.
Example of a standard system setup with one camera
Reference Devices other than the controller are optional (sold separately).
USB Handheld Controller

Illumination (OP-87983)
Expansion Unit
CA-DC40E Touch panel
Controller modular RS-232C cable
XG-X2700/X2702 (OP-87264: 3 m)
Touch panel
Monitor cable LCD monitor
(OP-66842: 3 m) CA-MP120T
24 V DC power supply
CA-U4
Camera cable* LED light cable
CA-D3R (3 m)
Area Camera
Area Camera
Lens
LED light
CA-DRW7
* The camera cable that you can use varies depending on the camera model. For details, see "List of maximum cable lengths by
camera" (Page 6-3).
1-2 XG-X SM(Area)-GB

Example of a standard system setup with four cameras
Before Setting Up
Area camera Input Unit
CA-E100 USB Handheld Controller
Controller (OP-87983)
XG-X2700/X2702
Camera cable*
24V DC power supply

CA-U4
Area camera
Area camera
Lens
Touch panel
modular RS-232C cable
(OP-87264: 3 m)
Monitor cable
(OP-66842: 3 m)
Touch panel LCD monitor

CA-MP120T
* The camera cable that you can use varies depending on the camera model. For details, see "List of maximum cable lengths by
camera" (Page 6-3).

Example of a standard system setup with a high-speed 21 megapixel camera or 64 megapixel camera
connected to the XG-X2900/X2902/X2800/X2802
Before Setting Up
To connect a camera to the XG-X2900/X2902/X2800/X2802, you need a camera input unit (the CA-E200/E200L for
Point
a 64 megapixel camera [supported only by the XG-X2900/X2902] / high-speed 21 megapixel camera and the CA-
E100/E100L for all other cameras) that supports the camera you are going to use.
Illumination
Camera input unit expansion unit USB Handheld Controller
CA-E200 CA-DC40E (OP-87983)
Controller
XG-X2900/X2902
LED light cable

CA-D3R (3 m)
Camera cable
24 V DC power supply CA-CF3 (3 m)
CA-U4 High-speed 21
megapixel camera
CA-HF2100M
Area Camera
Lens
RS-232C modular cable
for touch panels LED light
(OP-87264: 3 m) CA-DRW7
Monitor cable
(OP-66842: 3 m)
Touch panel LCD monitor

CA-MP120T

Example of a basic system using LumiTrax mode
• Devices other than the controller are optional (sold separately).
Before Setting Up
Reference • LumiTrax can also be used in LumiTrax Specular Reflection mode that uses LumiTrax specular reflection illumination.
For details on the LumiTrax mode and LumiTrax Specular Reflection mode, see the XG-X Series User's Manual.
Illumination
Expansion Unit USB Handheld Controller
CA-DC50E (OP-87983)
Controller
XG-X2700/X2702
LED light cable

CA-D3X (3 m)
Camera cable
CA-CH3 (3 m)
High-speed,
24 V DC power supply High-functioning Camera
CA-U4 CA-H048CX
Touch panel
modular RS-232C cable Lens
(OP-87264: 3 m)
LumiTrax light
CA-DRW10X
Monitor cable
(OP-66842: 3 m)
Touch panel
LCD monitor
CA-MP120T

Example of a basic system using LumiTrax mode (CA-DQW40X)

Reference
Before Setting Up
• LumiTrax can also be used in LumiTrax Specular Reflection mode that uses LumiTrax specular reflection illumination.
For details on the LumiTrax mode and LumiTrax Specular Reflection mode, see the XG-X Series User's Manual.
Illumination
Expansion Unit
CA-DC60E
(OP-87983)
Controller
XG-X2700/X2702
LED light cable

CA-D3MX (3 m)
Camera cable
CA-CH3 (3 m)
Touch panel
24 V DC modular RS-232C cable
power supply (OP-87264: 3 m) High-speed,
CA-U4
High-functioning Camera
CA-H048CX
Lens
Monitor cable
(OP-66842: 3 m)
Touch panel
LCD monitor Power supply cable
CA-MP120T (OP-88356: 2 m)
24 V DC
power supply
CA-U5

Example of a basic system using LumiTrax Specular Reflection Mode

Reference
Before Setting Up
• For details on the LumiTrax Specular Reflection mode, see the XG-X Series User's Manual.
Illumination
CA-DC60E (OP-87983)
Controller
XG-X2700/X2702
LED light cable

CA-D3MX (3 m)
Camera cable
CA-CH3 (3 m)
Touch panel High-speed,

24 V DC High-functioning Camera
modular RS-232C cable
power supply CA-H048MX
(OP-87264: 3 m)
CA-U4
Lens
Monitor cable
(OP-66842: 3 m)
LumiTrax light
(for LumiTrax Specular
Touch panel Reflection Mode)
LCD monitor CA-DXW10X
CA-MP120T

Example of a basic system using MultiSpectrum mode

Reference
Before Setting Up
• For details about the MultiSpectrum mode, see the XG-X Series User's Manual.
Illumination
Expansion Unit
(OP-87983)
CA-DC60E
Controller
XG-X2700/X2702
LED light cable

CA-D3MX (3 m)
Camera cable
CA-CH3 (3 m)
High-speed,
High-functioning Camera
24 V DC power supply
CA-H048MX
CA-U4 Touch panel
(OP-87264: 3 m)
MultiSpectrum
light
CA-DRM5X
Monitor cable Dome Attachment
(OP-66842: 3 m) CA-DRM5DA
Touch panel
LCD monitor
CA-MP120T

Example of a basic system using 3D Capture mode/Profile Capture mode
Before Setting Up
Reference • For details about the MultiSpectrum mode, see the XG-X Series User's Manual.
Illumination
CA-DC60E (OP-87983)
Controller
XG-X2700/X2702
LED light cable

CA-D3MX (3 m)
Camera cable
CA-CH3 (3 m)
High-speed,
24 V DC power supply High-functioning Camera
CA-U4 CA-H048MX
Touch panel
(OP-87264: 3 m)
Pattern projection light

CA-DQP12X
Monitor cable
(OP-66842: 3 m)
Touch panel
LCD monitor
CA-MP120T

Identifying Controls and Connectors

Before Setting Up
Controller
(1) (1) I/O (parallel I/O) connector
(2) Used for signal input and output (Page 5-16).
(3)
(4) (2) Power supply LED
(5) Lights up when the power is being fed to the unit.
(6)
(3) CONSOLE/MOUSE (USB) connector
(7)
Connects the USB handheld controller (OP-87983,
(8) sold separately), or the proprietary mouse (OP-87506,
sold separately).
(9)
(4) Error LED
(10)
Lights up in conjunction with the error output
(11) (%Error0) ON which is being used.
(12) (5) USB connector
Used to connect a USB cable (Page 5-4).
(13)
(6) SD2 slot (upper), SD1 slot (lower)
(14)
Insert an SD card (Page 7-4).
(15)
(16) The included SD card (CA-SD1G: 1 GB, or OP-87133:
512 MB) is inserted as SD card 1 in the lower slot
(SD1).
SD Card 1 must be inserted while the

Point device is operating.
(7) RS-232C port

Used to connect an optional RS-232C communication
cable (OP-26487: 2.5 m) or an optional RS-232C modular
cable for touch panels (OP-87264: 3 m/OP-87265: 10 m)
(Page 5-2).
By default, the RS-232C port is used for

Reference data output and command control. For
details about how to change the setting,
see the XG-X Series User's Manual.
(8) MONITOR (RGB output) terminal

Used to connect to an external monitor (Page 2-9).
The unit’s power GND (0V) is shared in
common with the connector shield and
signal GND.
If there is a potential difference with the
connection for the external monitor,
NOTICE this may result in breakdowns or
malfunctions of the unit and the
connected external monitor.
(Recommended monitors: CA-MP82/
CA-MP120/CA-MP120T)
The unit’s monitor output is XGA (1024 ×

Point 768 pixels). If commercial analog RGB
monitors other than XGA monitors are
used, the display quality may worsen
depending on the monitor’s specifications,
and images may not properly be displayed.

(1) (9) Expansion unit connector (right side)

(2) Used when connecting various kinds of expansion
(3)
(4) units (camera input unit, illumination expansion unit, or
Before Setting Up
communication expansion unit).
(5)
(6) (10) CAMERA 2 connector
(7)
Used to connect camera 2 (Page 2-9).
(8)
(11) USB HDD connector
Connect VisionDataStorage (CA-SDB2T: sold
(9)
separately) or a USB 3.0/USB 2.0 compatible USB
(10) HDD.
(11) The unit’s power GND (0V) is shared in
(12) common with the connector shield and
signal GND.
NOTICE If there is a potential difference with the
(13) connection for the USB HDD, this may
(14) result in breakdowns or malfunctions
(15) of the unit and the USB HDD.
(16)
To connect the USB Cable for
Point VisionDataStorage OP-88263, see the
OP-88263 Instruction Manual and the
VisionDataStorage User’s Manual.
• If there are concerns about the potential

Reference difference with the connections, then
use a USB HDD which supports bus
powered drives.
The unit’s bus power feed capacity is
900 mA (USB 3.0 compatible).
Check with the USB HDD manufacturer
concerning the compatibility with bus
powered drive of the USB HDD that you
are using.
In addition, do not use USB hubs since
they may cause the feed capacities and
the data transmission speeds to decrease.
• For information about connecting and
disconnecting the USB HDD, see
"Connecting and Disconnecting the
USB HDD" (Page 7-6).
(12) CAMERA 1 connector

Used to connect camera 1 (Page 2-9).
(13) ETHERNET connector
Used to connect an Ethernet cable (Page 5-3).
(14) OUT/IN connector (Terminal block)
Used for signal input and output (OUT/IN) (Page 5-18).
(15) Power and ground terminals
Used to connect power (24 V DC) and the ground wire
(Page 2-11).
(16) Fan unit
(XG-X2700/X2702/X2800/X2802/X2900/X2902/
X2800LJ only)
Equipped with controller cooling fan unit (CA-F100).
Although the equipped fan unit can be
detached and replaced for maintenance,
NOTICE the controller cannot be operated with
the fan unit detached.

Before Setting Up

2
Chapter
Installing and Connecting the Device

Installing and
Connecting the Device


Installing the Controller
Install the controller to the DIN rail, or use the holes on the bottom of the controller to secure it with screws.
• Do not install the controller in a location with lots of dust or water vapor. The controller does not have a mechanism
to protect it from dust or water. Dust or water entering the controller can cause damage to the controller.
• Turn off the controller when connecting or disconnecting an expansion unit, cable, or terminal block.
NOTICE Connecting or disconnecting a camera expansion unit, cable, or terminal block while connected to a power
source may damage the controller or peripheral devices.
• When an expansion unit is not connected, keep the connector protection cover on the controller. Using the
controller with the connector exposed may cause damage to the controller.
Caution on Direction of Controller Mounting

• Install the controller in the direction indicated by the circle shown below. Do not install the controller in any other direction.
Be careful in regard to cooling the unit in the installation site

• For ventilation, keep the space free of objects for 50 mm or more above the controller and 50 mm or more for both sides. Keep
the space free of objects for 90 mm or more in the front of the connector panel in order to connect the cables safely.
• If the controller units are to be installed in rows, make
sure that there are spaces of 50 mm or more between
the controllers, and spaces of 50 mm or more above 50 mm 50 mm
them.
* If spaces of 50 mm or more are ensured of even on the
underside orientations by DIN rail mounting, etc., then
50 mm 50 mm 50 mm
the units can be used at higher than rated
temperatures.
50 mm* 50 mm*
• Do not block the ventilation openings on the top and bottom of the controller. If the vents are blocked, heat
will accumulate inside the controller and can cause a system failure.
• If the temperature inside the control panel (temperature at the bottom of the controller) exceeds the rating,
use forced air-cooling or increase the free space around the system to improve ventilation until the operating
ambient temperature decreases below the rating.
NOTICE • When the temperature gets high inside the controller unit, the unit may display abnormal heat generation
alerts such as the following. (1) Warning: you are being notified that it is likely that operations may be
terminated due to high temperatures, (2) Operations terminated: as the possibility of thermal runaway and
unit damage occurring due to high temperature is high, operations are terminated as error state.
If these alerts are displayed, quickly implement countermeasures, such as lowering the usage ambient
temperature below the rated temperature, cooling the controller, and so on.
• Some of the models in the XG-X Series are factory-equipped with fan units (CA-F100) on their left sides. Although the fan units
can be detached and replaced for maintenance, the controllers cannot be operated with them detached.

Installing the Expansion Unit

• Turn off the controller when connecting or disconnecting an expansion unit. Connecting or disconnecting an
expansion unit while connected to a power source may damage the controller or peripheral devices.
NOTICE • When an expansion unit is not connected, keep the connector protection cover attached. Using the controller

with the connector exposed may cause damage to the controller.
Installing the Camera Input Unit Installing the Communication Expansion Unit
If you will be connecting three or more cameras, you can When using communication via a communication expansion
attach the camera input unit (sold separately) to the controller. unit, one optional communication expansion unit (EtherCAT:
Remove the protective cover of the expansion unit connector CA-NEC20E, EtherNet/IP: CA-NEP20E, PROFINET: CA-
from the right side of the controller, and then install the camera NPN20E) can be attached.
input unit as shown below. Remove the protective cover of the expansion unit connector
from the right side of the controller and install the
communication expansion unit as shown below.
• Illumination expansion units and

Point communication expansion units cannot Communication
be installed between camera input units expansion unit
and controllers.
• For the XG-X2700/X2702/X2500/X2502/ • Communication expansion units cannot
X2200/X2202/X2000/X2002/X1500/X1502/ Point be installed between camera input units
X1200/X1202/X1000/X1002, up to one unit and controllers.
of CA-E100 can be attached as a camera
• Multiple communication expansion units
input unit.
• For the XG-X2900/X2902/X2800/X2802, up to a cannot be used at the same time.
total of two units of CA-E100/E100L/E200/
E200L can be attached as camera input units.
Installing the Illumination Expansion Unit

If the illumination is to be controlled from the controller, up to a maximum of eight optional illumination expansion units (CA-
DC40E/DC50E/DC60E) can be added (note that the eight units can include only a maximum two CA-DC50E or CA-DC60E*
units or one each).
Remove the protective cover of the expansion unit connector from the right side of the controller and install the illumination
expansion unit as shown below.
* The XG-X1000 Series does not support the CA-DC60E unit.
Illumination expansion unit
Stop the power supply to the controller and the illumination expansion unit when connecting or removing an
NOTICE illumination expansion unit. Connecting or removing the illumination expansion unit while connected to a power
source may damage the controller or peripheral devices.

When Using the Camera Input Unit, Illumination Expansion Unit and Communication Expansion Unit
Together
Mount the camera input unit directly to the controller, then mount the illumination expansion unit and communication
expansion unit to the right side of the camera input unit.
Camera input unit
Illumination
expansion unit
Communication
expansion unit
Illumination expansion units and communication expansion units cannot be installed between camera input
Point units and controllers.

Fixing the Controller
NOTICE Mount the controller in a stable location that is free from vibration.

When mounting the controller on a bottom surface, you have to consider the heat dissipation of the bottom surface.
Reference For more details, see "Be careful in regard to cooling the unit in the installation site" (Page 2-2).
Installing the Controller on a DIN Rail Base Installation of the Controller

The controller and the expansion unit are designed to be
mounted on a DIN rail.
Tab
Pull the tab on the bottom in the direction of the arrow

to mount or dismount the controller. M4 screws
(0.8 or less Nm tightening torque)

Installing the Camera
Installing the Camera

Notes on Electrical Insulation

• The camera case acts as the ground for the camera circuit. If the installation location has any electrical
NOTICE potential or noise, it may cause internal damage and malfunction. For secure insulation, be sure to use the
plastic mounting bracket and screws that are supplied when installing the camera.
• If the supplied plastic mounting parts are not used in the installation, take care to insulate adequately.
1 Install the lens on the camera.

Select an appropriate lens according to the size of the object and distance between the object and the camera (Page 2-7).
For more details about how to attach a close-up ring between the camera and the lens, see "Using the Close-up
Reference Rings" (Page 2-8).
Lens
• Do not touch the inside of the camera when installing the lens.
Important • Take care to ensure dust and/or foreign material does not enter into the camera.
2 Install the camera using the screw holes provided on the plastic mount.
• When installing the camera, use a tightening torque of 0.5 Nm and a maximum tension of 30 N.
Important • Leave enough space around the lens to ensure easy adjustment of the focus and aperture (Page 4-8).
• If the camera is mounted where there is vibration, the lens mount or the lock screw for the lens may
loosen. Use of a locking bond adhesive is recommended in such a case.
• Mounting the provided plastic mount on a side other than the bottom of the camera can cause gaps
between the mount and the camera. If the installation needs to be very precise, try to fix the mount to the
bottom of the camera.
To allow for future adjustment of the camera, use a 4-Axis Adjustable Camera Mount Kit. Opening elongate holes
Reference on the mounting stage of the camera will allow for similar adjustments to be made.
Warning on Installation Space for the Camera

When installing the camera, maintain 30 mm or more of
space above the camera and 15 mm or more on both sides.
30 mm
15 mm 15 mm

Selecting the Lens
Selecting the Lens
Select a lens according to the size of the target (field of view

(FOV): Y) and the distance (working distance (WD)) from the
tip of the lens attached to the camera to the target.
Select a suitable lens referencing the FOV chart.
The FOV chart differs depending on the
Reference models of the camera and lens to be used. For
Field of
view: Y
the FOV chart that corresponds to the various
combinations of cameras and lenses, see
WD
"Field of View and the Working Distance by
(Working distance)
Camera (FOV Chart)" (Page 6-9). Target
Confirm the Working Distance from the FOV Chart.

The numbers in the FOV chart represent the thickness required for the close-up ring. Install the close-up ring between the
lens and the camera when required.
• The numerical numbers shown in the FOV chart are typical values. Fine adjustment is needed during installation.
Point • If a close-up ring is used, the inherent peripheral resolution performance of the lens may not be satisfied.
• For more details about the close-up ring, see "Using the Close-up Rings" (Page 2-8).
Lens selection example

The following describes the flow of selecting a lens when using an Environment resistant 0.35 megapixel camera (CA-035C)
and a high precision lens (CA-LH*(G/P)) with the following conditions as an example.
Conditions
• With a target size of 60 mm and a conveyance error of ±10 mm, the FOV must be 100 mm.
• WD must be kept within a range of 200 to 300 mm.
Select a lens that matches the conditions from the FOV chart when using an Environment resistant 0.35 megapixel camera
(CA-035C) and a high precision lens (CA-LH*(G/P)).
WD 200 to 300 mm
(1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

1000 (7)
(8)
(9)
100 Field of view

100 mm
0.5 1.0 0.5
0.5 5
Y: Field 0.5
1.5
of view 1.5 1.0 10
1.5
(mm) 1.5 1.0 5 15
5
10 20
5 10
10 5 10 30
20 40
15 20
20 60
30 40
60 100
1
10 100 1000 10000
WD: Working distance (mm)
(1) CA-LH4 (2) CA-LH5P (3) CA-LH8(G/P) (4) CA-LH12(G/P) (5)CA-LH16(G/P) (6) CA-LH25(G/P)
(7) CA-LH35(G/P) (8) CA-LH50(G/P) (9) CA-LH75
On the FOV chart, look for points that satisfy the necessary FOV within the required WD range.
For the above conditions, (3) CA-LH8 (G/P) (close-up ring: none) satisfies the conditions.
The FOV chart differs depending on the models of the camera and lens to be used. For the FOV chart that corresponds to the
Reference various combinations of cameras and lenses, see "Field of View and the Working Distance by Camera (FOV Chart)" (Page 6-9).

Selecting the Lens
Using the Close-up Rings

The close-up ring is installed between the camera and the lens.
Close-up rings are available in a set of five different sizes of 0.5 mm, 1.0 mm,
5 mm, 10 mm, and 22 mm (OP-51612, optional).
If a single ring does not provide the required thickness, combine multiple
rings.
• Use the 5 mm (OP-51500) or 10 mm (OP-51501) close-up ring when using
the high-speed, small camera (CA-HS035M/HS035C) and the ultra small
camera (XG-S035C/S035M). Close-up ring
• Use the 5 mm (OP-66830) or 10 mm (OP-66831) close-up ring when using
the high-speed, small camera (CA-HS200C/HS200M) and the small
camera (XG-S200C/S200M).
• No close-up ring can be used when a 2-inch lens is attached to the 64 megapixel camera (CA-HF6400C/M).
• If you use the 0.5 mm or 1.0 mm close-up rings with other close-up rings, the lens may become loose through
Point vibrations due to insufficient tightening with the camera. Use of a locking bond adhesive is recommended in
such a case.
• If you use a close-up ring, the peripheral resolution performance of the lens may not be fully exploited.
• For more information about the required close-up ring thickness, see "Field of View and the Working Distance
by Camera (FOV Chart)" (Page 6-9).
Looking up the FOV for the macro lens

• Use the formula below when calculating the macro lens field of view.
Field of view (mm) in the Y direction = Imaging element size in the Y direction ÷ Optical magnification
For example, when CA-LM2 (2x optical magnification) is used with CA-035M, 3.3 (Imaging element size in the Y
direction) ÷ 2 (optical magnification) = 1.65 mm.
• The size of the Imaging element in the Y direction for each type of camera is shown below.
Imaging element size
Model Imaging element size Number of pixels Unit cell size
in the Y direction
CA-035C/M 640 x 480
1/3-inch 6.9 μm 3.3 mm
CA-H035C/M 512 x 480
XG-035C/M 640 x 480
1/3-inch 7.4 μm 3.6 mm
XG-H035C/M 512 x 480
CA-H048CX/MX 784 x 596 2.9 mm
CA-HX048C/M 1/3-inch 640 x 480 4.8 μm
2.3 mm
512 x 480
CA-200C/M 1600 x1200 5.4 mm
1/1.8-inch 4.5 μm
CA-H200C/M 1024 x 960 4.3 mm
XG-200C/M 1600 x1200 5.3 mm
1/1.8-inch 4.4 μm
XG-H200C/M 1024 x 960 4.2 mm
CA-H200CX/MX 1/2-inch 1600 x1200 3.45 μm 4.1 mm
CA-HX200C/M 2/3-inch 1600 x1200 5.0 μm 6.0 mm
CA-H500C/M
2/3-inch 2432 x 2050 3.45 μm 7.1 mm
XG-H500C/M
CA-H500CX/MX 2432 x 2040 7.0 mm
2/3-inch 3.45 μm
1600 x1200 4.1 mm
CA-HX500C/M 2432 x 2040 10.2 mm
1-inch 5.0 μm
1600 x1200 6.0 mm
CA-H2100C/M 5104 x 4092 14.3 mm
4/3-inch 3.5 μm
XG-H2100C/M 2432 x 2050 7.0 mm
CA-HF2100C/M 5104 x 4092 10.2 mm
1-inch 2.5 μm
2432 x 2050 5.1 mm
CA-HF6400C/M 8192 x 7808 19.5 mm
2-inch 2.5 μm
7168 x 5768 14.4 mm
• The optical magnification is based on the optical design value. Individual variability will occur depending on assembly accuracy.
The maximum Imaging element size that a macro lens can support is determined by its model. If you use a
Point macro lens which does not support the Imaging element size, vignetting may occur or the area around the
captured image may be dark due to the applied image size being insufficient.

Connecting Cables
Connecting Cables

Notes when connecting cables
• Make sure that there is no power to the controller before connecting cables. Connecting cables while the
power is turned on may cause damage to the camera or peripherals.
• Bundle cables with a spiral tubing like protective material. Direct bundling will concentrate the cable load on
NOTICE the bindings, which can result in cable damage or short circuit.
• In the absence of other specifications, the minimum bending radius (R) should be 3 times or more the external
diameter of the cable (5 times or more is recommended). Additionally, repeated flexing and twisting should be
avoided. The minimum bending radius is the same, even when using high-flex cable. Unless otherwise stated,
choose R100 or greater when you use a cable carrier.
1 Connect the camera to the camera connector of the

controller.
Connect the camera to the camera connector of the
controller or the camera input unit connected to the
controller.
If connecting only a single camera, attach it to the
camera 1 connector.
If connecting only a single camera,

Camera 2 Camera 1
attach it to the camera 1 connector.
Connecting the camera and its cable

Point Align the connectors and insert the cable all the way to the back
of the connector. Fully turn the metal knurling of the connector to
secure it to the camera, and then additionally tighten with a tool
Apply additional
(through approximately 1/6 to 1/4 of a turn). If the connector is not tightening with a tool.
tightened enough, it may become loose due to vibration, etc.,
resulting in poor contact and camera connection errors.
Moving the camera

When moving the cameras, use high-flex cables and fix the cables near the camera connectors so that no
load is applied to the camera connectors when the cameras are moved. If the cables near the camera
connectors move when the cameras are moved, it may cause camera connection errors.
Do not connect cameras, LJ-V series heads, or camera cables, etc. which the controller does not support. This
NOTICE may cause failures, or breakdowns of the unit and connected devices.
• The XG-X2800/X2900 controller does not have a camera connector, so a camera input unit that supports
Point the camera to be connected is required. For details, see "Cameras and Camera Input Units That Can Be
Connected" (Page 6-2).
• The supported camera cables vary depending on the area camera model.
• For more details about the camera and cable combinations which the controller supports, see "List of
maximum cable lengths by camera" (Page 6-3).

Connecting Cables
Using the camera cable extension repeater

Camera cables can be extended by using the camera
cable extension repeater (CA-CNX10U/CHX10U)
(Page 6-56, 6-85, 6-86).
For more information on connection, read the
instructions provided with the camera cable extension

repeater.
Camera cable
extension repeater
2 Connect the USB handheld controller (OP-87983, sold

separately) or the dedicated mouse (OP-87506, sold
separately) to the CONSOLE/MOUSE(USB) connection
port on the controller. To CONSOLE/MOUSE(USB)
connector
3 Connect the monitor to the video output terminal of the

controller.
To RGB video image output terminal
The unit’s power GND (0V) is shared in common with the connector shield and signal GND.
If there is a potential difference with the connection for the external monitor, this may result in breakdowns
NOTICE or malfunctions of the unit and the connected external monitor.
(Recommended monitors: CA-MP82/CA-MP120/CA-MP120T)
• The controller’s monitor output is XGA (1024 × 768 pixels). If a commercial RGB analog monitor other
Point than an XGA monitor is used, the display quality may worsen depending on the monitor’s specifications,
and images may not be displayed properly.
• When connecting the controller via Keyence touch panel VT3 and VT3-VD4, use the special RGB cable
(3 m) OP-66842 or RGB cable (10 m) OP-87055. If a commercial RGB cable is used, the screen may not be
displayed correctly.

Connecting Cables
4 Connect the DC 24 V power.
• Use electrical wiring AWG14 to AWG22. Ring lug terminal

• Make sure to connect the frame ground terminal for the DC 24 V power
source to a Class D ground. 5.8 mm or less
• The solderless terminal sizes are noted in the figure on the right. Use a

NOTICE size that fits M3 screws.
Spade lug terminal
• Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.5 to 0.75 [Nm].
5.8 mm or less
(1) Connect 24 V DC and 0 V to the power terminals.
Do not connect the 0 V power terminal

NOTICE to the ground terminal or the ground
wire.
Connecting to 24V DC Connecting to 0V DC
(2) Connect the ground wire to the grounding terminal.
Connect ground wire here
• Ground each device separately.

• Use a Class D ground.
• Keep ground resistance to 100 or less.
• Keep the ground wire as short as possible.
• If it is not possible to ground each device separately, ground them together. However, make sure that the
electrical cables are the same length.
NOTICE
Device Peripheral Device Peripheral Device Peripheral
A B B
A
A=B A>B
D-type ground (third class ground) D-type ground (third class ground) A<B
(ground resistance 100 Ω) (ground resistance 100 Ω)

Selection and Installation of LED Lighting

Up to 16 LED lights can be controlled from the controller using the optional illumination expansion unit CA-DC40E/DC50E/DC60E.
Reference See "Expansion Unit" (Page 5-20) for more details.
Selecting the Correct Lighting System

Use the correct lighting system to ensure stable inspection
Inspecting in one of the following locations may lead to unstable detection. Relocate the inspection or use a dedicated
lighting system.
• Locations where the inspection is exposed to direct sunlight
• Locations where the outside light varies greatly depending on the time of day
• Locations where the amount of light changes due to the movement of machines and people
Ask your KEYENCE sales representative for details.
Reflected illumination
Illuminates broadly and evenly using a lighting system
such as a ring light. This type of lighting is suitable for
general surface inspection.
LED Illumination System Light source

• Direct-ring lights (CA-DR)
• Multi-angle light (CA-DR**M/DQ**M)
Target
Transmitted illumination
Illuminates from behind the target.
This type of lighting is suitable for measuring the shape,
size, and position of a thin target.
LED Illumination System Target

• Back lights (CA-DS)
Light source
Oblique illumination
Illuminates the target from an angle.
This type of lighting is suitable for surface inspection when
you want to reduce the effects of glare or specular
reflection.
Li
gh
ts
ou
rc
LED Illumination System

e
• Bar lights (CA-DB/DZ) Target

Coaxial Illumination
Illuminates along the same axis as the lens.
This type of lighting makes flat glossy surfaces on the
target appear brighter. This is suitable for surface
inspection or position and size measurement of a glossy

Light source
surface.
Half mirror

Target
• Coaxial lights (CA-DX)
Low-angle Illumination
Illuminates the target from a very low angle.
This type of lighting is suitable for detecting minute
defects such as surface flaws (cuts and dirt) and markings
on glossy surfaces, and chipped edges on bottle mouths.
e
urc t
so
Ligurce
soLigh
ht
• Low-angle lights (CA-DL) Target
• Multi-angle light (CA-DR**M/DQ**M)
• Square lights (CA-DQ)
Dome Illumination
Illuminates evenly around a target. Dome lighting is more
effective when used as close as possible to the target.
This type of lighting reduces shadows and hot spots
because it evenly distributes the light over the target's
surface.
Light source Target Light source

• Dome lights (CA-DD)
Spot Illumination
Used with a coaxial macro lens.
This type of lighting provides high contrast, even
illumination for images captured under high magnification.
LED Illumination System Light source
• Spot lights (CA-DP)
Target
LumiTrax™ illumination
Uses a dedicated light that is internally divided into
multiple segments, and emits partial lighting and captures
images multiple times with one inspection.
This is suitable for such applications as defect inspections
that eliminate the influence from the background, which Light source
was difficult with conventional light.
Target
• LumiTrax light (CA-DRW*X/DRM*X/DXW10X/DQW40X)
For details, see the XG-X Series User's Manual.

Reference

MultiSpectrum illumination
A dedicated multi-angle ring light with eight built-in color
LEDs and a dome attachment (option) are used to perform
image capture multiple times in a single inspection
session while switching the color that is emitted
(MultiSpectrum Mode).
This is very useful for an appearance inspection to extract Light source Light source
a specific pattern from a background in which a variety of
colors are used.
Type of lighting Target
• MultiSpectrum light (CA-DRM**X) Dome Attachment (sold separately)

Reference
Coaxial Vertical Illumination for LumiTraxTM (Specular Reflection Mode)

The angle of incidence of light for each pixel is made to
change by the coaxial illumination's projection of 4 different
stripe patterns to obtain 4 different striped images for each
Light source
of the X and Y directions.
This is suitable for the inspection of such things as metallic
Half mirror
glossy surfaces, for which inspection is often difficult and
the appearance changes with just a change in the object's Target
position or angle, and defects, flaws and dents which
could not be detected without changing how light strikes
the object during visual inspection.
Type of lighting
• LumiTraxTM (Specular Reflection Mode) light (CA-DXW10X)

Reference
Pattern projection Light

3D images are created from the pattern projections from
eight directions and the multiple image captures linked
with the pattern projections. Image processing is then
performed using the height information (3D Capture
mode).
Projector
This is suitable for presence inspections, shape
judgments, and other such operations where inspections
were difficult just with the shading and color differences of
the target.
Type of lighting
• Pattern projection lights (CA-DQPX)

Reference
Target

Using the Illumination Expansion Unit

Precautions and wiring when using the optional illumination expansion unit CA-DC40E/DC50E/DC60E* are explained here.
* The XG-X1000 Series does not support the CA-DC60E unit.

Usage Precautions
• For more details on general precautions for the illumination expansion unit, see "Safety information for XG-X
Series" (Page 4).
WARNING • For more details on cautions and warnings in the installation and handling of the unit, see the operation
manuals of the illumination expansion unit and LED light that are being used.
Power supply
Do not use with any power voltage other than DC 24 V. Doing so may cause fire, electric shock, or damage to
CAUTION the unit.
Important Always connect the frame ground terminal or ground terminal when a switching regulator is used.
Handling
• Illumination units may reach very high temperatures while in operation and immediately after use. Avoid
direct contact. Doing so may cause burns.
• Do not disassemble or modify the unit. Doing so may cause fire, electric shock, or damage to the unit.
CAUTION • Do not stare into the LED light source for prolonged periods of time. This may cause damage to the eyes.
• Correctly set the voltage for the illumination unit on the CA-DC40E illumination expansion unit. If a 12 V
illumination unit is mistakenly connected to the connector terminal block for which the set voltage has been
changed to 24 V, this may cause a fire, electric shock, or product malfunction.

Connecting Cables
After attaching the illumination expansion unit to the controller (Page 2-3), follow the procedure below to connect the LED
illumination unit and the 24 V DC power supply.
• An LED illumination unit that has a different output connector shape, such as a 24 V type, can also be wired directly
Reference
to the terminal block of the CA-DC40E.

• For more details about the specifications for the CA-DC40E, CA-DC50E and CA-DC60E terminal blocks, see
"Expansion Unit" (Page 5-20).
• All of the illustrations in this section are of the CA-DC40E.
1 Connect the LED light to the output connector of the illumination expansion unit.
Correctly set the voltage for the illumination unit on the CA-DC40E illumination expansion unit. If a 12 V illumination unit
CAUTION is mistakenly connected to the connector terminal block for which the set voltage has been changed to 24 V, this may
cause a fire, electric shock, or product malfunction.
If the light connector is to be removed or attached, shut off the power supply to the illumination expansion unit. If the light
NOTICE connector is removed or attached while power is being supplied, this may cause the illumination expansion unit and the
light emitter to malfunction or become damaged.
The light numbers are 1 for the bottom connector, and 2 for the top connector. If several illumination
Point expansion units are connected, the light numbers are assigned in ascending order from the unit close to
the controller.
2 Supply a 24 V DC power source to the power input terminal of the IN connector terminal block.
• Use a flat head screwdriver to connect the power supply to the input terminals.
Point • Use a torque of 0.25 Nm or less to tighten the screws.
• Use electrical wiring AWG16 to AWG28.
• Make sure to connect the frame ground terminal for the DC 24 V power source to a Class D ground.
• Do not supply power until the installation is completed.
• Do not apply soldering (preliminary soldering or pre-soldering) to the tip of electrical wire to be processed.
(1) Remove the IN connector terminal block from the

illumination expansion unit.
Terminal block
(2) Loosen the screw of the IN connector terminal Flathead

screwdriver
block using a flat head screwdriver.
(3) After stripping the insulating sheath by about 7

mm, insert the wires to terminal 24 V DC and 0 V
and ground wire (FG), and then tighten the screws.
Strip sheath
on wire and insert
(4) After connecting all the necessary wires, securely

insert the IN connector terminal block into the I/O
connector as far as it will go.

Points To Note When Installing a LumiTrax Light/Camera System
When using the LumiTrax Mode

When installing a system that will use the LumiTrax Mode, satisfy the following points.

• Align the position of the connector of the camera and the light when mounting.
• Align the camera and light center axes when installing.
• Align and install the camera and the light in the directions as shown below.
Position of the connector

for connecting the LumiTrax
light connection cable
Position of the camera

connector
If the direction cannot be aligned due to restrictions in the installation location, make adjustments in the [Lighting
Reference Position Adjustment] settings. For more details, see the XG-X Series User's Manual.
Precautions regarding attaching the lights (CA-DQW40X)

This product is heavy (it weighs approximately 3.0 kg), so use stiff brackets that support this weight when attaching this
product to equipment and do so according to the method shown below.
Attaching this product to equipment using a method other than that specified by KEYENCE may lead to this product
NOTICE falling down or to equipment damage.
To attach the light, use all the screw holes (4 × M6, maximum depth: 10 mm) on the top of the CA-DQW40X to fix the light
in place on the brackets. Be sure to use the brackets in a structure such that they provide support on both sides of the
equipment, as is shown in attachment examples 1 and 2.
• Attachment examples 1 • Attachment examples 2

When using the LumiTrax Specular Reflection Mode

When installing a system that will use the LumiTrax Specular Reflection Mode, satisfy the following points.
• When positioning the camera and the illumination unit relative to each other, ensure proper relation between the position
of the camera connector and the direction of the illumination cable as viewed from the rear side of the camera.
• Normally, the camera and the illumination unit should be installed so that the illumination cable is on the left side as
shown below.
Position of the camera connector
Direction of LumiTrax light cable

(for LumiTrax Specular Reflection Mode)
If direction alignment is impossible due to the installation site conditions, you can make adjustment in units of 90° in
Reference "Installation Condition Settings".
For more details, see the XG-X Series User's Manual.

Points to Note When Installing a 3D Capture Mode, Profile Capture

Mode/Camera System
When using the 3D Capture mode/Profile Capture mode

When installing a system that uses 3D Capture mode/Profile Capture mode, pay attention to the following points regarding
the positional relationship with the camera.
• Align the camera and light connector positions when attaching them.
• Align the camera and light center axes when installing them.
• Align and install the camera and the light in the directions shown below.
Positions of the light

connectors
Positions of the camera

connectors
Precautions regarding attaching the lights (CA-DQP25X)

The CA-DQP25X is heavy (it weighs approximately 4.2 kg), so use stiff brackets that support this weight when attaching
the CA-DQP25X to equipment and do so according to the method shown below.
Attaching the CA-DQP25X to equipment using a method other than that specified by KEYENCE may lead to the
NOTICE CA-DQP25X falling down or to equipment damage.
To attach the light, use all the screw holes (6 × M6, maximum depth: 9 mm) on the top of the CA-DQP25X to fix the light in
place on the brackets. Be sure to use the brackets in a structure such that they provide support on both sides of the
equipment, as is shown in attachment examples 1 and 2.
• Attachment example 1 • Attachment example 2
The light can also be attached with the through-holes (4 × ø9) in the four corners of the CA-DQP25X. In this situation, use
the area within the mounting plane for each through-hole specified below as the supporting shape to prevent the bracket
shape from interfering with the light.
Mounting plane
. 4
11
ø9
52
R2

Recommended measurement range and light exposure range in 3D Capture mode

When using 3D Capture mode, adjust the position of the light so that the inspection target is within the recommended
measurement range.
Recommended measurement range Light exposure range

If the target is within the light exposure range, the target may interfere with the transmitted light or reflected light from the
target may have an effect on operation.
Also, caution is necessary regarding interference when multiple lights are installed.
Obtain the necessary space and block the light as necessary.
• Pattern projection light (125 mm type)

CA-DQP12X
100 Reference distance

150 125
Recommended
measurement range
64 125
• Pattern projection light (250 mm type)

CA-DQP25X
200
Reference distance
250
300
Recommended
measurement range
102 250

3
Chapter
I/O Wiring
I/O Wiring


Overview
Overview
This chapter describes the wiring methods that are necessary

for basic input and output control that uses the I/O interfaces
below.
I/O Wiring
(1) I/O interfaces used in this chapter
(1) Parallel I/O interface (40-pin) (Page 5-16)

Use the specialized OP-51657 parallel connection cable
(3 m) (sold separately).
(2) (2) Terminal block interface (OUT 9-pin) (Page 5-19)
Standard on this controller as an attachable/detachable
terminal block.
(3) (3) Terminal block interface (IN 8-pin) (Page 5-19)
Standard on this controller as an attachable/detachable
terminal block.
Capturing images of workpieces subject to inspection, output
of the inspection result, and monitoring the status of the
controller are performed on the below terminals that are on
these I/O interfaces.
I/O terminals used in this chapter

• Trigger 1 input (Page 3-3)
A signal for capturing images. Inputs a signal from an
external device to the controller when an image is to be
captured.
• Permission output for trigger 1 input (Page 3-4)
A signal that indicates whether the controller can receive
trigger 1 input. If a signal can be received, it is output
from the controller to an external device.
• Error output and run mode output (Page 3-5)
Error output is a signal that indicates the operation state
of the controller. If an error occurs on the controller, it is
output from the controller to an external device.
Run mode output is a signal that indicates the operation
state of the controller. If this controller is running, a signal
is output from the controller to an external device.
• Total status output and strobe output (Page 3-6)
Total status output is a signal that indicates whether the
inspection result is OK or NG. If the result is NG, a signal
is output from the controller to an external device.
Strobe output is a signal that indicates the finalization of
Total status output. A signal is output from the controller
to an external device when Total status output is
finalized.
• For more details about the behavior of the
Reference above signals while this controller is running,
see the timing chart (Page 3-7).
• I/O interfaces can control commands and data
input and output in addition to those listed
above. For more details, see the "XG-X Series
Communications Control Manual".

Trigger 1 Input
Trigger 1 Input
This is an example of terminal wiring for inputting a trigger signal from a PLC or a synchronization sensor to the controller.
When you want to capture an image with the camera that trigger 1 is assigned to, turn on F_IN0 (TRG1) externally.
The external terminal that is to be actually wired is terminal No. 1 COMIN1 (COMIN1) and terminal No. 3 F_IN0 (TRG1) of
I/O Wiring
the terminal block interface (IN connector).
If the output device is compatible with the NPN

open collector input
When connecting an NPN PLC output to the system input
OUT F_IN0
(1) COMIN1
(COMIN1)
(3) F_IN0
COM(-) COMIN1
(TRG1)
24V DC
PLC (NPN output) Input circuit on controller
When connecting an NPN synchronization sensor output

to the system input
Brown F_IN0
Black
Blue
COMIN1
24V DC
Input circuit on controller
If the output device is compatible with the PNP open

collector input
When connecting a PNP PLC output to the system input
F_IN0
COM(+)
COMIN1
24V DC
OUT
PLC (PNP output)
When connecting a PNP synchronization sensor output to

the system input
F_IN0
Brown
COMIN1
24V DC
Black
Blue

Permission Output for Trigger 1 Input
Permission Output for Trigger 1 Input
This is an example of terminal wiring for checking whether trigger 1 can be input. If input to trigger 1 is possible, the
controller turns on terminal No. 22 OUT4 (Trg1Ready) of the parallel I/O interface.
The terminal that is to be actually wired is terminal No. 22 OUT4 (Trg1Ready) and terminal No. 40 COMOUT2 (common for
I/O Wiring
the connector output) of the parallel I/O interface.
If the input device is compatible with the NPN

open collector output
(22) OUT4
Cable Color :
Red When connecting the output from the controller to a
(40) COMOUT2
PLC with a positive common
(Connector output
common) IN
Cable Color : Poly Switch
Black
OUT4
COMOUT2
COM(+)
24V DC
PLC input circuit Output circuit on controller
positive common
The color of the cable in the above figure is the

If the input device is compatible with the PNP
Reference color of the specialized OP-51657 parallel open collector output
connection cable (3 m) (sold separately).
When connecting the output from the controller to a
Since the controller utilizes a photo MOSFET PLC with a negative common
Point in the output elements, any one of the NPN IN
inputs, or PNP inputs can be connected by Poly Switch
simply wiring the respective compatible
OUT4
inputs. For more details about wiring, see the
connection example.
COMOUT2
COM(-)
24V DC
negative common

Error Output and Run Mode Output
Error Output and Run Mode Output
This is an example of terminal wiring for checking the controller's error and run statuses. If an error occurs, the controller
turns on terminal No. 3 F_OUT2 (ERR) of the terminal block interface (OUT connector). If the controller is operating, the
controller turns on terminal No. 4 F_OUT3 (RUN) of the terminal block interface (OUT connector).
I/O Wiring
The actual wiring is for terminal No. 3 F_OUT2 (ERR), terminal No. 4 F_OUT3 (RUN), and terminal No. 9 COMOUT_F
(COMF) of the terminal block interface (OUT connector).


(3) F_OUT2
(ERR)
PLC with a positive common
(4) F_OUT3 IN
(RUN) Poly Switch
(9) COMOUT_F
F_OUT2
F_OUT3
COMOUT_F
COM(+)
24V DC
positive common
Since the controller utilizes a photo MOSFET
Point in the output elements, any one of the NPN
inputs, or PNP inputs can be connected by If the input device is compatible with the PNP
simply wiring the respective compatible open collector output
connection example. When connecting the output from the controller to a
PLC with a negative common
IN
Poly Switch
F_OUT2
F_OUT3
COMOUT_F
COM(-)
24V DC
negative common

Total Status Output and Strobe Output
Total Status Output and Strobe Output
This is an example of terminal wiring for checking whether the total status of inspection is OK or NG. If the total status is NG, the
controller turns on terminal No. 2 OUT23 (OR) of the terminal block interface (OUT connector). As this total status is output for
STO (strobe) synchronization, terminal No. 1 OUT22 (STO) of the terminal block interface (OUT connector) is also necessary for
I/O Wiring
checking the total status.

The actual wiring is for terminal No. 1 OUT22 (STO), terminal No. 2 OUT23 (OR), and terminal No. 5 COMOUT1 (COMOUT) of the
terminal block interface (OUT connector).
• For an example of the behavior of total status OR and STO signals, refer to the timing chart (Page 3-7).
Point • To output total status OR, a terminal output unit needs to be added. For details, see the XG-X Series User's
Manual.


(1) OUT22
(STO) PLC with a positive common
(2) OUT23
(OR) IN Poly Switch
(5) COMOUT1
(COMOUT) OUT22
OUT23
COMOUT1
COM(+)
24V DC
positive common

Since the controller utilizes a photo MOSFET Relay with a positive common
Point in the output elements, any one of the NPN
inputs, or PNP inputs can be connected by Poly Switch
Load
simply wiring the respective compatible OUT22
OUT23
connection example.
COMOUT1
24V DC
Relay Output circuit on controller
If the input device is compatible with the PNP


PLC with a negative common
IN
Poly Switch
OUT22
OUT23
COMOUT1
COM(-)
24V DC
negative common

Relay with a negative common
Poly Switch
Load
OUT22
OUT23
COMOUT1
Relay 24V DC Output circuit on controller

Timing Chart
Timing Chart
An example of behavior from trigger input to total status output (when synchronizing with STO)
(1)
I/O Wiring
ON
Trigger Input
(F_IN0 %Trg1) OFF
Permission Output ON
for Trigger 1 Input
(OUT4 %Trg1Ready) OFF
B C
ON
Error Output
(F_OUT2 %Error0) OFF
ON
Run Mode Output
(F_OUT3 %Run) OFF
(2)
ON
Total Status OR Output Flow execution result at the time
of executing the terminal output unit
(OUT23 %JAHold) OFF
D E F
ON
Strobe STO Output
(OUT2 %STO) OFF
A: Smallest trigger input time 1 ms or higher

B: %Trg1Ready fall response delay 1 ms or less
C: %Trg1Ready fall time Depends on the settings
D: Output start time Depends on the settings
E: Status change time Depends on the settings (1 to 999 ms; default setting: 5 ms)
F: Output time Depends on the settings (1 to 999 ms; default setting: 10 ms)
(1) A trigger can be input when the permission output for trigger input is ON. When a trigger is input, the camera
starts capturing images.
This is the behavior when Image Capture Buffer is enabled (default setting).
Reference For details, refer to the "XG-X Series Communications Control Manual".
(2) Each time the total status OR switches, the strobe STO output turns on and after the output time has passed
turns off. Total status OR turns off for a pass (OK) and on for a fail (NG) (default setting). A pass/fail can be
determined by getting the AND of the rise of strobe STO output and the total status OR output.
• To output total status OR, a terminal output unit needs to be added (refer to Setting example)
Point the setting example).
• This is the behavior when there is no handshake.
For details about the behavior when there is a handshake, refer to the XG-X
Series User's Manual.
• You can change E: Status change time and F: Output time via the settings.
For information about how to change the times, refer to "Setting the Status
Change Time and Output Time" (Page 3-8).

Setting the Status Change Time and Output Time
Setting the Status Change Time and Output Time
You can change E: Status change time and F: Output time on the timing chart (Page 3-7) via the settings.
Depending on the PLC scan time, the output from the controller may not be able to be detected with the default
Reference
I/O Wiring
settings. In that case, set the output time (ms) and status change time (ms) to a value higher than the scan time.
1 Switch to Setup mode.

For information about how to switch modes, refer to
"Switching between Run Mode and Setup Mode" (Page 4-3).
If the unit is already in Setup mode, you do not need to
follow this step.
2 On the [Global] menu, select [Communications & I/O] -

[Terminal Block & Parallel Port].
3 Adjust [Status change time (ms)] and [On time(ms)].
4 Once you have completed the settings, select [OK]. The

settings screen closes.
If you changed the input and output terminal

Point assignments, you need to restart the controller.

Chapter
4
Checking the Wiring and
Adjusting the Camera
Checking the Wiring and Adjusting the Camera


Starting Up the Controller
This section explains how to adjust the controller from its purchased condition to capture images properly.
Point To adjust the controller, you need an optional USB handheld controller (OP-87983) or a special mouse (OP-87506).
Reference The software may not operate as described below if program settings have already been uploaded.
2 In the [System Language] box, select the language to use.

Check that a Screen is Displayed • Japanese
on the Monitor • English
• Traditional Chinese
1 Confirm that the cables are connected correctly, and
then turn on the power. • Simplified Chinese
After the opening screen is displayed, the initial • German

startup screen appears.
3 Click [Close].
If you want to change [System Language] after

Reference starting the unit for the first time, in Setup mode
select [Global] - [System Settings] - [Language] and
change to your desired language.
If nothing appears on the monitor

Check the following:
• Are the power input terminals connected correctly?
• Are you using a 24 V DC power supply that satisfies
the controller's rated consumption current?
• Have the power input terminals (+24 V) and (0 V)
been connected in reverse polarity by mistake?
• Is the monitor cable connected correctly?
• Is the monitor turned on?
• Does the monitor support XGA (1024 x 768 pixel)
resolution, and 60 Hz vertical frequency?

Switching between Run Mode and

Setup Mode
Switching from Setup mode to Run mode
1 Select [Go to Run Mode].

2 If a confirmation screen appears, select [OK].
The mode switches to Run mode
Switching from Run mode to Setup mode
1 On the handheld controller, press the No. 1 (FUNCTION)

button.
The Function menu appears.
2 Select [Change to Setup Mode].
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Select [OK].
The mode switches to Setup mode.
• You can also switch between Run mode and

Reference Setup mode by flipping the No. 8 switch
(RUN/STOP) on the handheld controller.
• The unit starts in Setup mode as the default
setting. You can change the mode the unit
starts in to Run mode from [Global] -
[System Settings] - [Startup Settings] in
Setup mode.

Checking the Wiring
Checking the Wiring
4 Input a trigger signal from the PLC to the controller and

Checking the Input Signal check that the [F_IN0 (%Trg1:0)] check box is selected.
If the signal is correctly input from the PLC to the
Input a trigger signal from the PLC or synchronization sensor controller, the check box will be selected.
into the controller and check that the trigger is correctly input.
You can check whether the trigger signal is correctly input If the signal input time is short, the screen
Point refresh rate cannot keep up and the check
into the controller on the I/O monitor.
box may not be selected even if the signal

was correctly input. Input the signal for a
sufficiently long amount of time.
"Switching between Run Mode and Setup Mode"
(Page 4-3). If the unit is already in Setup mode, you do
not need to follow this step.
2 Select [Utilities].
3 Select [I/O Monitor & Diagnostics].

Checking the Wiring
Checking the Output Signal 4 For [Manual Control], select [ON].

If you select the check box for a terminal in this state,
Check whether the signal is output correctly from the controller
that terminal will turn on.
to the PLC.
On the I/O monitor, forcibly output a signal output by the
controller and check that you can check that signal on the PLC.
If you selected [Utilities] - [I/O Monitor &

Point Diagnostics] from the Function menu in Run
mode, you cannot forcibly output a signal. To

perform forcible output, switch to Setup mode.

(Page 4-3). If the unit is already in Setup mode, you do
not need to follow this step.
2 Select [Utilities].
5 Select the check box for a wired terminal and check that it
can be recognized on the PLC.
3 Select [I/O Monitor & Diagnostics].

In this section, the camera will be adjusted and an image

3 Select [Camera-Trigger-Light Configuration Settings].
will be shown.
If you will use existing program setting data,

Reference see "Importing Settings" (Page 7-9) of "Chapter
7 Appendix".
Enabling Light
Enable the light connected to the illumination expansion
unit. If you are not using an illumination expansion unit, this
setting is unnecessary.

For information about how to switch modes, refer to 4 Select the check box for the light that you want to use.
(Page 4-3).
5 Select [OK] to apply changes and close the screen.
2 Select the capture unit.
• The Capture unit is the unit (processing

Reference unit) for capturing workpiece images
that are subject to inspection and
measurement with a camera.
• For typical handheld controller
operations and functions, refer to
"Controlling the Handheld Controller
(Optional)" (Page 7-2).

Adjusting Brightness and Focus 6 Once you complete adjusting the lens aperture and
focus, select [OK]. The [Camera Settings] screen
In this section, the shutter speed, lens aperture, and focus closes.
will be adjusted.
1 In the capture unit, select [Camera Settings].

7 Select [Save] and on the confirmation screen, select
[OK]. The settings will be saved.
2 Select the [Live Image] check box. 8 Select [OK] and the capture unit setting screen closes.
The camera image will be continuously updated,

rather than per trigger input. This will make adjusting
the brightness and focus easier.
3 Adjust the image brightness by adjusting the shutter speed.
Saving camera images

In [Simulation Image Capture] of the capture unit, you can
save camera images to an SD card.
For details, see "Saving Camera Images for Simulation"
(Page 7-10).
4 Also adjust the lens aperture.
For information about adjusting the lens aperture,
refer to "Adjusting the Lens" (Page 4-8).
5 Next, adjust the focus.

For information about adjusting the lens focus, refer to
"Adjusting the Lens" (Page 4-8).

For a small camera

Adjusting the Lens
While viewing the monitor, turn the aperture locking
While viewing the monitor, turn the aperture ring and the screws A and B and the lens setting collar to adjust the
focus ring to adjust the aperture and focus. aperture and focus.
An example for the CA-LH: Aperture locking screw A
Locking screw on focus ring

Lens setting collar

Aperture locking screw B
Locking screw on aperture ring
• Adjusting the aperture: Loosen the locking screw on the 1 Screw the lens setting collar on the thread completely.
aperture ring and then make adjustments such that the Similarly, install the lens as far on the thread as it will go.
target and the surroundings can be distinguished. 2 Adjust the distance between the camera and the target,
• Adjusting the focus: Loosen the locking screw on the focus then loosen the lens until the image is focused.
ring and then make adjustments such that the outline of the
target object is captured sharply.
3 Fix the lens with the lens setting collar at the position
where the image is in focus.
The positions of the aperture ring and focus
Reference ring differ depending on the lens. Generally, the
4 Loosen the aperture locking screws A and B to adjust
aperture ring has values such as 1.4, 8, 16, and for the best possible brightness of the image.
so on written on it, and the focus ring has ∞m, The image becomes brighter when turned towards the
FAR/NEAR, and so on written on it. For details,
OPEN side, and darker when turned towards the
see the lens that you are using.
CLOSE side.
When the aperture and focus adjustments are complete, 5 After brightness is adjusted, fix the aperture with the
tighten the locking screws so that the aperture ring and aperture locking screws A and B.
the focus ring do not move.

In the Case that an Error Message is 4 Select [Auto].

Displayed
5 Select [OK] to set the model for the selected camera.
If the error message "Program settings are

referring to an unconnected camera." is displayed
You need to set the camera model.
1 In the capture unit, select [Camera-Trigger-Light

Configuration Settings].
6 Select [OK]. The [Camera Selection] screen closes.
2 Select [Camera Selection].
7 Select [OK]. The [Camera-Trigger-Light Configuration

Settings] screen closes.
3 Select the applicable camera.

If the error message "The illumination expansion 5 Select [OK]. The [Camera-Trigger-Light Configuration
unit set in Illumination Expansion Unit Model Settings] screen closes.
Settings is not connected." is displayed
You need to set the illumination expansion unit model.
1 In the capture unit, select [Camera-Trigger-Light

Configuration Settings].
2 Select [Set Model].
3 Select [Auto].
4 Select [OK]. The model for the illumination expansion

unit will be set.

5
Chapter
Overview of the I/O Interface
This controller has the following communication and I/O ports.

• RS-232C Interface (Page 5-2)
I/O Interface • Ethernet Interface (Page 5-3)
• USB Interface (Page 5-4)
• CC-Link Interface (Page 5-6)
• EtherCAT Interface (Page 5-9)
• EtherNet/IP Interface (Page 5-11)
• PROFINET Interface (Page 5-13)
I/O Interface
• Parallel I/O Interface (Page 5-16)
• Terminal Block Interface (Page 5-18)
In addition to controlling the controller through the I/O ports,

measurement results can be output, the controller can be
controlled, and files can be input and output by using the
communication ports. Additionally, the expansion unit
connected to the controller is also equipped with I/O ports.
For information about the I/O and communication ports, refer
to the "XG-X Series Communications Control Manual".
Example of communication port usage

Data such as measurement results and NG images are output
to the PC via Ethernet while the inspection settings are
controlled from the PLC via RS-232C.
PLC-1 PLC-2
Command control Command control

RS-232C RS-232C
(Switch programs) (Switch programs)
Data output Data output

Ethernet · Inspection Ethernet · Inspection
results results
· NG images · NG images
HUB or router
Ethernet
PC
Communication software is required to receive

Reference data on the computer.


RS-232C Interface
RS-232C Interface
The RS-232C port on the system can be used to communicate

with external equipment. The system can communicate with Connecting to a PC
external equipment using two communication modes: non-
procedural mode or the PLCLink mode.
The transmitted data will differ depending on the communication Example when RS-232C port is used
mode. Switch modes depending on the environment. Refer to The controller can be connected to your computer using a
"XG-X Series Communications Control Manual" for more details dedicated serial cable (optional).
on the non-procedural mode and switching the communication
I/O Interface
mode. When the PC has a D-sub 9-pin connector
RS-232C Port Specifications

OP-26487 (2.5 m)
RS-232C basic specifications
• Connector: RJ-11 OP-26486
• Standards: The connected device must comply with EIA XG-X Series PC
(Electronic Industries Association) RS-232C standards.
Item Compatibility • In the connection example above, flow
Point control is not possible.
Communication System Full-duplex
• The controller uses the communication
Synchronous system Asynchronous
settings selected in the communication
Transmission Code ASCII (Part binary code) mode specified in the System Settings in
Data Length 8-bit XG-X VisionEditor. For more details, refer
Stop-bit 1-bit/2-bit to "XG-X Series Communications Control
Parity-bit None/odd/even Manual".
Communication speed 9600/19200/38400/57600/115200/
230400 bps
Start Delimiter STX/ENQ/ASCII Code/None
End Delimiter CR/CR+LF/LF/EXT/ASCII Code
Flow Control None, CTS/RTS
Maximum cable length 15 m
Connector specifications
The specifications of the RS-232C port on the controller are
as follows:
No. Signal Signal Description Signal direction

1 CS (CTS) Data Transmission Output
Permission
2 Not used — —
3 SD (TXD) Data Transmission Inputs
4 SG (GND) GND —
5 RD (RXD) Data Reception Output
6 RS (RTS) Data Transmission Inputs
Request
Since the controller uses the RS-232C modem

Reference definition, SD is assigned to input and RD is
assigned to output.

Ethernet Interface
Ethernet Interface
The Ethernet port on this controller can be used to

communicate with external devices in addition to Ethernet Port Specifications
connecting to Keyence computer application software.
The controller can communicate with external equipment Standard specifications
using communication modes: non-procedural mode
• Connector: RJ-45
based on the RS-232C command set, the PLC-Link mode,
EtherNet/IP, and PROFINET. The system has an FTP client • Medium: 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T
• Supports jumbo frames
I/O Interface
function / SFTP client function in which an external FTP
server can be specified as the output destination for (When the CA-NEC20E/NEP20E/NPN20E is connected)
sending result data, an FTP server function in which • Jumbo frames are only enabled when a
access to the SD card of this unit is possible from an Point communication expansion unit (CA-
external FTP client, and a VNC server function in which NEC20E/NEP20E/NPN20E) is connected
remote operation is possible from an external PC client. to the controller.
• To use jumbo frames, all devices on the
• To use EtherCAT communication mode, network must support jumbo frames.
Point an EtherCAT unit (CA-NEC20E: sold
separately) is necessary. For details, refer
to EtherCAT Interface (Page 5-9). Connector Specifications
• The EtherNet/IP communication mode The specifications of the Ethernet port are as follows:
and PROFINET communication mode can
be used with the Ethernet port as well as
with EtherNet/IP units (CA-NEP20E: sold 햹
separately) and PROFINET units (CA-
NPN20E: sold separately). For more
details, see the EtherNet/IP interface
(Page 5-11) and the PROFINET interface
(Page 5-13). 햲
For more details about various types of

Reference communications control using the Ethernet 10BASE-T/
1000BASE-T
port, refer to the XG-X Series Communications 100BASE-TX
No.
Control Manual. Signal Signal
Signal Signal
direction direction
1 TX + Output TRX+ Input/Output
2 TX - Output TRX- Input/Output
3 RX + Inputs TRX+ Input/Output
4 Not used — TRX- Input/Output
6 RX - Inputs TRX- Input/Output
7 Not used — TRX+ Input/Output
Use a category 5e LAN cable or above when

Point connecting via 1000 Base-T. An STP type is
recommended for the cable structure.

USB Interface
USB Interface
The USB port (type 'B' female connector) on the controller is

used exclusively for connecting to Keyence computer Connecting to a PC
application software. The USB port cannot be used with any
other software. You can connect the controller to the PC via the USB port. To
connect the controller to the PC, use the optional USB cable
The power GND (0V) is shared in common (2 m) OP-66844.
with the connector shield and signal GND.
If there is a potential difference with the • Only 1 controller can be connected to a
NOTICE Point
I/O Interface
connected device, this may result in single PC.

breakdowns or malfunctions of the • If a cable other than OP-66844 or an extension
controller and the connected device. cable is used, the controller may not operate
correctly.
• The USB port is used exclusively for
connecting to a computer. Other USB
USB Port Specifications devices cannot be connected to this port.
• Communication may be interrupted due to
high voltage or electrical noise near the
Standard specifications system. If communication is interrupted,
disconnect and re-connect the USB cable,
• Connector: Female B connector
and restart the software.
• Standard: USB Version 2.0. • If communication interruption occurs
frequently, check the surrounding area for
noise sources (inverter, solenoid valve, etc.).
Connector Specifications
Specifications of the USB port on the controller are as follows:
System requirements
To connect the controller to a PC via the USB port, a PC with
the following requirements is needed.
햲 햵
• OS: Microsoft Windows10 Home/Pro/Enterprise (64 bit
햳 햴 version only), Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium/
Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate (64 bit version only)
(Other Windows operating systems are not supported.)
• USB terminal that supports USB 2.0
Signal
No. Signal Signal direction
Description
1 VBUS VBUS -
2 D- Differential signal- Input/Output
3 D+ Differential Input/Output
signal+
4 GND GND -

USB Interface
Installing the USB driver

To use the controller's USB interface, you must first install
Keyence application software and the USB driver for the XG-
X Series before connecting the controller to a computer.
Normally the USB driver is installed when the Keyence
application software is installed. However, if the driver was not
installed, follow the procedure below to install the USB driver.
USB driver installation must be performed by a

Point user with Administrator privileges.
This section describes how to install the driver, using
I/O Interface
Windows 7 as an example.
1 Turn on the controller and the PC.
2 Connect the USB port of the controller and that of the PC

using the OP-66844 cable (optional).
3 On the computer, open Device Manager, and under

[Other devices] in Properties, click [Update driver]. Next,
click [Browse my computer for driver software] and specify
the folder that contains the USB driver.
The USB driver will be installed.
• If Keyence application software is

Reference installed, the USB driver will also reside in
C:\drivers\XG-H1X. You can also download
the driver from the Keyence user support
page (www.keyence.com/xgxus).
• When installing USB drivers in PC, a warning
message may appear confirming the
installation. When such a warning message
appears, click [Continue] to continue
installation.
The controller is now ready to communicate with PC

via the USB port.

CC-Link Interface
CC-Link Interface
The controller can be used as a remote device station on a Wiring Diagram

network connection with a CC-Link master station by
connecting the optional CA-NCL20E unit. The CC-Link
햷 DA 햲
interface supports command execution, input / output of
햸 DB 햳
system variables for control and output of measurement 햹 DG 햴
result data. 햺 SLD 햵
The settings in the Global Settings are used to set the 햻 (FG) 햶
I/O Interface
station type, communication speed, and number of

exclusive stations on the CC-Link. For more details, see
Wire Signal
the XG-X Series Communications Control Manual. No. Function
color name
• The controller must be turned off before 1, 6 Blue DA Communication wire "DA" for CC-Link.
connecting or disconnecting the CA-NCL20E Connects to the master station or other
slave stations (1 and 6 are shorted).
NOTICE unit.
• Restart the controller and master station 2, 7 White DB Communication wire "DB" for CC-Link.
after changing the CC-Link settings. Connects to the master station or other
See "Installing the Communication Expansion
Reference Unit" (Page 2-3) for more details on connecting
3, 8 Yellow DG Communication wire "DG" for CC-Link.
Connects to the master station or other
the CA-NCL20E unit.
4, 9 Bare SLD Shield.
wire Connect the shielded wire of the CC-Link
CA-NCL20E CC-Link Specifications Ver. 1.10 compatible cable (OP- 79426,
OP-79427, etc.) (4 and 9 are shorted.).
5, 10 — FG Frame ground "FG" for CC-Link. Ground
Standard specifications using Class D ground* (100 Ω or less) (5
and 10 are shorted).
Item
CC-Link station type Ver.1.10 remote device station * Use a cable with a nominal cross-section area
Point of at least 2 mm2 as the grounding cable.
Ver.2.00 remote device station
Communication speed 156 kbps, 625 kbps, 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps,
10 Mbps
Connection cable Ver.1.10 compatible CC-Link cable
FANC-110SBH, FA-CBL200PSBH, CS110
OP-79426, OP-79427
Max. total cable length 156 kbps 1200 m
625 kbps 900 m
2.5 Mbps 400 m
5 Mbps 160 m
10 Mbps 100 m
Count Select 1 station, 2 stations, 3 stations, or 4
stations.
Cyclic settings Select 1x, 2x, 4x, or 8x.
(Ver.2.00 only)

CC-Link Interface
CA-NCL20E terminating resistor installation

Connecting to the CC-Link
DA
DA
Precautions when wiring Terminating
resistor DB
Take note of the following when wiring the CA-NCL20E unit. DG
• When connecting the CA-NCL20E to a CC-Link DB SLD
(FG)
network/device, always use a CC-Link Ver.1.10
compatible cable or a cable approved by the CC-Link
Partner Association. Correct operation cannot be
Because terminals 1 and 6, and terminals 2
assured when using another type of cable. Reference and 7, are shorted, the terminating resistor can
• When a CC-Link cable is used near a high voltage/ be installed either onto terminals 1 and 2, or
I/O Interface
current source or cable, electrical noise may cause onto terminals 6 and 7.
operational errors. When using both a CC-Link cable

and high voltage/current devices, maintain at least 100
mm of separation between them.
Terminating resistor
When connecting a CA-NCL20E unit to both ends of the
CC-Link network, install a terminating resistor between
CA-NCL20E terminals DA and DB. Make sure to install the
terminating resistors, as they reduce signal noise and
stabilize communications.
Master station
Terminating Terminating
resistor resistor
CA-NCL20E Other unit Other unit Other unit CA-NCL20E
The terminating resistor will differ depending on the

cable type
Two of each are shipped, one for terminating each end of the
network with CA-NCL20E. Use the correct terminating resistor
for the type of CC-Link cable being used.
Cable type Terminating resistor

Ver. 1.10 compatible CC-Link cable 110Ω 1/2W
FANC-110SBH, FA-CBL200PSBH,
CS110
OP-79426, OP-79427
Brown
Brown
Brown
Gold
CC-Link cable
CC-Link high-performance cable 130Ω 1/2W

Orange
Brown
Brown
Gold

CC-Link Interface
CC-Link Unit (CA-NCL20E: option)

(1) Connector on controller side
Connect the unit to the controller, or to the camera
L RUN
(2) input unit or expansion unit already connected to the

(3)
L ERR
controller (Page 2-3).
Only one CC-Link unit can be connected

Point to the controller.
(4)
(2) Operation status indicator light (L RUN)
(1) (5)
• ON: Master station and self station are updating the
I/O Interface
data correctly (green light lit).

• OFF: Data communication timed out (light will turn
on again when data is being received correctly).
(3) Error indicator lamp (L ERR)
• ON: Communication error (red light lit).
• Flashing at constant intervals: Station number or
communication speed setting was changed during
data transfer.
• Flashing irregularly: Terminator is not installed
properly and or the unit or CC-Link cable is being
affected by electrical noise.
• OFF: No communication errors
(4) Terminal block
See the wiring diagram (Page 5-6).
(5) Connector on expansion unit side
This is used when connecting an illumination
expansion unit (Page 2-4).
The camera input unit cannot be connected

Point to the connector on the expansion unit side.

EtherCAT Interface
EtherCAT Interface
The controller can be used as an EtherCAT slave on a Wiring Diagram (IN port/OUT port)
network connection with an EtherCAT master by
connecting the optional CA-NEC20E unit. The EtherCAT
interface supports command execution, input / output of
system variables for control and output of measurement
result data.
The settings in the Global Settings are used to set the
I/O Interface
EtherCAT. For more details, see the XG-X Series
Communications Control Manual.
No. Signal name Function
• The controller must be turned off before
connecting or disconnecting the CA- 1 TX + Transmission data (+)
NOTICE NEC20E unit. 2 TX - Transmission data (-)
• Restart the controller and master after
3 RX + Reception data (+)
changing the EtherCAT settings.
4 - Terminating resistor 75Ω connected
See "Installing the Communication Expansion 5 - Terminating resistor 75Ω connected
Reference Unit" (Page 2-3) for more details on connecting 6 RX - Reception data (-)
the CA-NEC20E unit.
CA-NEC20E EtherCAT
Specifications Connecting to EtherCAT Network
Standard specifications Connect the network cable of the master to the IN port RJ
connector. When there is a slave downstream from the
controller, connect a network cable to the OUT port RJ
Item connector.
Complied standard IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
Communication speed 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX)
Communication cycle 500 μs at minimum
Connection cable Category 5e STP cable or above Connect the network IN port
cable of the master
Distance between 100 m
nodes OUT port
Connect the network
Communication ports RJ45 connector x 2 cable of the slave
Communication size 536 bytes (input) 532 bytes (output)
Supported functions Process data object communication
(cyclic communication)
Mailbox communication (aperiodic
communication)
Compatible to CoE
Explicit Device Identification
Conformance test Compliant with V2.1.0.2
version Use category 5e STP (Shielded Twisted Pair)
Important
Point cables or above as the network cables. You
can use either straight or cross cable.

EtherCAT Interface
EtherCAT Unit (CA-NEC20E: option)

(3) controller (Page 2-3).
Only one EtherCAT unit can be

Important
Point connected to the controller.
(4)
(2) RUN indicator lamp (RUN)
(1) (5) Indicates the EtherCAT communication state of the
I/O Interface
(6) controller (green).

• ON: OPERATIONAL state.
The PDO communication and mailbox
communication are properly running.
• Flashing (single flash)*1: SAFE-OPERATIONAL state.
• Flashing (blinking)*2: PRE-OPERATIONAL state.
• OFF: INIT state.
*1
Repeats 0.2 seconds ON -> 1 second OFF.
*2
Repeats 0.2 seconds ON -> 0.2 seconds OFF.
(3) ERR indicator lamp (ERR)
Indicates the error state of the EtherCAT
communication of the controller (red).
• Flashing (double flash)*1: Watchdog timeout.
- Make sure that the master is properly
connected.
- Make sure that the master is properly
running.
• Flashing (blinking)*2: Configuration error.
Make sure that no irregular process data
object is assigned to the Sync Manager.
• OFF: No error has occurred.
*1 Repeats 0.2 seconds ON -> 0.2 seconds OFF ->
0.2 seconds ON -> 1 second OFF.
*2
Repeats 0.2 seconds ON -> 0.2 seconds OFF.
When [External Input Request] is not

Reference assigned to the process data object, the
LED lighting state does not change even
when the connection with the master is
disconnected.
(4) IN port
Refer to "Wiring Diagram" (Page 5-9).
expansion unit.
The camera input unit cannot be

Important
Point connected to the connector on the
expansion unit side.
(6) OUT port


EtherNet/IP Interface
Connecting the CA-NEP20E (sold separately) makes it Wiring Diagram (P1 port/P2 port)
possible to connect this unit as an EtherNet/IP adapter to
an EtherNet/IP scanner over a network.
With the EtherNet/IP interface, not only can measurement
results be output, but the input/output of the control
system variables and commands can also be executed.
I/O Interface
EtherNet/IP. For more details, see the XG-X Series
The controller must be turned off before
NOTICE connecting or disconnecting the 1 TX + Transmission data (+)
CA-NEP20E unit. 2 TX - Transmission data (-)
Reference Unit" (Page 2-3) for more details on connecting 4 - Terminating resistor 75Ω connected
the CA-NEP20E unit. 5 - Terminating resistor 75Ω connected
6 RX - Reception data (-)
CA-NEP20E EtherNet/IP 8 - Terminating resistor 75Ω connected
Specifications
Connecting to EtherNet/IP
Standard specifications
Network
Item
Connect the EtherNet/IP network cable to the P1 or P2 port
of the RJ connector. If there are any adapters downstream
Communication speed 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX) from this unit, connect the network cable to a port that is
Communication cycle 1 ms at minimum not in use.
Connection cable Category 5e STP cable or above
nodes
Communication ports RJ45 connector x 2 P1 port
Communication size 1436 bytes

Supported functions Cyclic communication (Implicit message), P2 port
Message communication (Explicit message)
UCMM, and Class 3 support,
Compatible to DLR (Device Level Ring)
Conformance test Compliant with Version.CT16
Use category 5e STP (Shielded Twisted Pair)

Important

EtherNet/IP Unit (CA-NEP20E: option)

Only one EtherNet/IP unit can be

Important
(4)
(2) Network Status LED (NS)
(1) (5) Indicates the EtherNet/IP communication status.
I/O Interface
(6) • Not lit: The power is turned off or the IP

address has not been set.
• Lit in green: A connection has been
established.
• Blinks in green: No connection has been
established.
• Lit in red: A fatal error (such as duplicate IP
addresses) has occurred.
• Blinks in red: A time-out occurred during
connection.
(3) Module Status LED (MS)
Indicates the status of the communication expansion
unit.
• Not lit: The power is turned off.
• Lit in green: The scanner is in the Run state and
is being controlled.
• Blinks in green: The device has not been set or the
scanner is in the Idle state.
• Lit in red: A serious malfunction (such as the
EXCEPTION state and fatal errors)
has occurred.
• Blinks in red: This is a recoverable malfunction.
The module has been set but the
saved parameters are different from
the parameters that are being used.
(4) P1 port
expansion unit.
The camera input unit cannot be

Important
expansion unit side.
(6) P2 port

PROFINET Interface
PROFINET Interface
Connecting the CA-NPN20E (sold separately) makes it Wiring Diagram (P1 port/P2 port)
possible to connect this unit as a PROFINET slave to a
PROFINET master over a network.
With the PROFINET interface, not only can measurement
results be output, but the input/output of the control
system variables and commands can also be executed.
I/O Interface
PROFINET. For more details, see the XG-X Series
The controller must be turned off before
NOTICE connecting or disconnecting the 1 TX + Transmission data (+)
CA-NPN20E unit. 2 TX - Transmission data (-)
Reference Unit" (Page 2-3) for more details on connecting 4 - Terminating resistor 75Ω connected
the CA-NPN20E unit. 5 - Terminating resistor 75Ω connected
6 RX - Reception data (-)
CA-NPN20E PROFINET 8 - Terminating resistor 75Ω connected
Specifications
Connecting to PROFINET
Standard specifications
Network
Item
Connect the PROFINET network cable to the P1 or P2 port
of the RJ connector. If there is a slave downstream from
Communication speed 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX) this unit, connect the network cable to a port that is not in
Communication cycle 1 ms at minimum use.
Connection cable Category 5e STP cable or above
nodes
Communication ports RJ45 connector x 2 P1 port
Communication size 1248 bytes

Supported functions Data I/O communication P2 port
Record data communication
Applicable protocols LLDP, DCP, MRP, SNMP
Conformance test Compliant with Conformance Class C
V2.34
Use category 5e STP (Shielded Twisted Pair)

Important

PROFINET Interface
PROFINET Unit (CA-NPN20E: option)

Only one PROFINET unit can be

Important
(4)
(2) Network Status LED (NS)
(1) (5) Indicates the PROFINET communication status.
I/O Interface
• Not lit: The power is turned off.

(6)
A connection with the I/O controller
has not been established.
• Lit in green: A connection with the I/O controller
has been established and the I/O
controller is in the RUN state.
• Blinks in green one time:
A connection with the I/O controller
has been established, but the I/O
controller is in the STOP state or IO
data is not normal.
• Blinks in green: Identification of network nodes is
being performed from the
engineering tool.
• Lit in red: A serious internal error has
occurred.
(Use this in combination with the
Module Status LED lighting in red.)
• Blinks in red one time:
The Station Name has not been set.
• Blinks in red two times:
The IP address has not been set.
• Blinks in red three times:
The settings specified from the I/O
controller differ from the actual
settings.
(3) Module Status LED (MS)
Indicates the status of the communication expansion
unit.
• Not lit: The power is turned off or the
communication expansion unit has
not been initialized.
• Lit in green: The initialization of the
communication expansion unit is
complete.
• Blinks in green one time:
A diagnosis event exists.
• Lit in red: (When the Network Status LED is lit
in red)
A serious internal error has
occurred.
(When the Network Status LED is
not lit in red)
The communication expansion unit
is in the EXCEPTION state.
• Lights in red and green alternately:
The firmware is being updated.
Do not turn the power off. Turning
off the power during this phase may
lead to malfunctions.
PROFINET Interface
(4) P1 port
(2) (5) Connector on expansion unit side
(3)
expansion unit.
(4) The camera input unit cannot be

Important
(1) (5) expansion unit side.
(6) (6) P2 port

I/O Interface

Parallel I/O Interface
Use the dedicated parallel connection cable (3
Reference m) OP-51657 (sold separately) to wire devices
(1) (21) to the connector.
I/O Interface
(20) (40)
Pin Layout: Cable colors when optional OP-51657 is used.
Assigned default state*1 Circuit

Terminal Signal Cable
No. Terminal explanation Assigned N.O/ diagram
name direction Variable function *2 Bit color
variable N.C (Page 5-26)
1 COMIN2 Connector input common — — — - - - Brown

2 IN0 General purpose input 0 In %CmdParam Custom instruction 0 - B Red
parameter input
3 IN1 General purpose input 1 In %CmdParam 1 - B Orange
4 IN2 General purpose input 2 In %CmdParam 2 - B Yellow
5 IN3 General purpose input 3 In %CmdParam 3 - B Green
6 IN4 General purpose input 4 In %CmdParam 4 - B Blue
7 IN5 General purpose input 5 In %CmdParam 5 - B Purple
8 IN6 General purpose input 6 In %CmdParam 6 - B Gray
9 IN7 General purpose input 7 In %CmdParam 7 - B White
10 IN8 General purpose input 8 In %CmdCode Custom instruction No. 0 - B Black
11 IN9 General purpose input 9 In %CmdCode input 1 - B Brown
12 IN10 General purpose input 10 In %CmdCode 2 - B Red
13 IN11 General purpose input 11 In %CmdCode 3 - B Orange
14 IN12 General purpose input 12 In %CmdStrobe Custom instruction 0 - B Yellow
assignment input (terminal)
15 IN13 General purpose input 13 In %Reset Reset input 0 - B Green
16 IN14 General purpose input 14 In %Pst Output data input switch 0 - B Blue
17 COMOUT2 Connector output — — — - - - Purple
common
18 OUT0 General purpose output 0 Out %Ack Pin command success 0 N.O C Gray
confirmation output
19 OUT1 General purpose output 1 Out %Nack Pin command failure 0 N.O C White
confirmation output
20 OUT2 General purpose output 2 Out %Busy Busy output 0 N.O C Black
21 OUT3 General purpose output 3 Out %CmdReady Permission output for 0 N.O C Brown
command input
22 OUT4 General purpose output 4 Out %Trg1Ready Permission output for 0 N.O C Red
trigger 1 input
23 OUT5 General purpose output 5 Out %Trg2Ready Permission output for 0 N.O C Orange
trigger 2 input


Terminal Signal Cable
No. Terminal explanation Assigned N.O/ diagram
name direction Variable function*2 Bit color
variable N.C (Page 5-26)
24 OUT6 General purpose output 6 Out %OutDataA Data output of system 0 N.O C Yellow
25 OUT7 General purpose output 7 Out %OutDataA variable % 1 N.O C Green
OutDataA
26 OUT8 General purpose output 8 Out %OutDataA 2 N.O C Blue
27 OUT9 General purpose output 9 Out %OutDataA 3 N.O C Purple
28 OUT10 General purpose output 10 Out %OutDataA 4 N.O C Gray
29 OUT11 General purpose output 11 Out %OutDataA 5 N.O C White
30 OUT12 General purpose output 12 Out %OutDataA 6 N.O C Black
31 OUT13 General purpose output 13 Out %OutDataA 7 N.O C Brown
I/O Interface
32 OUT14 General purpose output 14 Out %OutDataA 8 N.O C Red
33 OUT15 General purpose output 15 Out %OutDataA 9 N.O C Orange
34 OUT16 General purpose output 16 Out %OutDataA 10 N.O C Yellow
35 OUT17 General purpose output 17 Out %OutDataA 11 N.O C Green
36 OUT18 General purpose output 18 Out %OutDataA 12 N.O C Blue
37 OUT19 General purpose output 19 Out %OutDataA 13 N.O C Purple
38 OUT20 General purpose output 20 Out %OutDataA 14 N.O C Gray
39 OUT21 General purpose output 21 Out %OutDataA 15 N.O C White
40 COMOUT2 Connector output common — — - - - Black
*1 The default assigned state refers to the default system variables assigned to each pin in the Global menu. These assignments may
vary if the Global settings have been changed.
*2 For details about the functions of individual variables, refer to the XG-X Series Communications Control Manual.
• COMOUT2 for Pin 17 and Pin 40 are common.

Point • Power source 0 V, COMIN1, COMIN2, COMOUT1, COMOUT2 and COMOUT_F are all isolated.
• COMIN2 is a common terminal exclusively for input pins 2 to 16 on the parallel I/O connector.
• COMOUT2 is a common terminal exclusively for output pins 18 to 39 on the parallel I/O connector.

Terminal Block Interface
Standard Specifications
Terminal block specifications for the controller are as follows.
Point Tightening above the specified torque may cause damage to the terminal block.
I/O Interface
OUTPUT connector INPUT connector
STO (1)
OR
ERR
RUN
COM
OUT
FLS1
COM
IN1 (1)
PLC
FLS2
TRG1
NC
COM TRG2
F
(9) TEST
EXT
(6)
Suitable wiring
Suitable wiring
AWG 16 - 28
AWG 16 - 28
Terminal block screw torque
Terminal block screw torque
0.25 Nm or less
0.25 Nm or less

Pin Layout
OUTPUT connector

Signal
No. Terminal name Terminal explanation Assigned N.O/ diagram
direction
variable Variable function*2 Bit
N.C (Page 5-26)
1 OUT22 (STO) General purpose output 22 Out %Sto Strobe output for reading 0 N.O C
parallel terminal output
unit data
2 OUT23 (OR) General purpose output 23 Out %JAHold Hold output total status 0 N.O C
I/O Interface
3 F_OUT2 (ERR) High-speed general purpose Out %Error0 Error 0 output 0 N.O C
output 2
4 F_OUT3 (RUN) High-speed general purpose Out %Run Run mode output 0 N.O C
output 3
5 COMOUT1 Common for terminal block — — — - - -
(COMOUT) outputs
6 F_OUT0 (FLS1) High-speed general purpose Out %Flash1 Strobe light output 1 0 N.O C
output 0
7 F_OUT1 (FLS2) High-speed general purpose Out %Flash2 Strobe light output 2 0 N.O C
output 1
8 N.C - - - - - - -
9 COMOUT_F(COMF) Common for high-speed - - - - - -
general purpose output
terminals
• Power source 0 V, COMIN1, COMIN2, COMOUT1, COMOUT2 and COMOUT_F are all isolated.
Point • COMOUT1 is the common terminal for output of OUT connectors 1 to 2.
• COMOUT_F is the common terminal for output of OUT connectors 3 to 4 and 6 to 7.
( ) indicates labels printed on terminal blocks at time of shipment
INPUT connector

Signal
No. Terminal name Terminal explanation Assigned N.O/ diagram
direction
variable Variable function*2 Bit
N.C (Page 5-26)
1 COMIN1 (COMIN1) Common for terminal block — — — - - -

inputs
2 IN15 (PLC) General purpose input 15 In %Plc Custom instruction 0 - B
execution input (PLC)
3 F_IN0 (TRG1) High-speed general purpose In %Trg1 Trigger 1 input 0 - A
input 0
4 F_IN1 (TRG2) High-speed general purpose In %Trg2 Trigger 2 input 0 - A
input 1
5 F_IN2 (TEST) High-speed general purpose In %Test Trial run input 0 - A
input 2
6 F_IN3 (EXT) High-speed general purpose In %Ext Disable trigger input 0 - A
input 3
• Power source 0 V, COMIN1, COMIN2, COMOUT1, COMOUT2 and COMOUT_F are all isolated.
Point • COMIN1 is the common terminal for input of IN connectors 2 to 6.
( ) indicates labels printed on terminal blocks at time of shipment

Expansion Unit
Expansion Unit
Illumination Expansion Unit (CA-DC40E : Option)

(2) Connect the unit to the controller, or to the camera
input unit or expansion unit already connected to the
(3)
(4)
I/O Interface

(6) Lit when the power is supplied to the illumination
(7) expansion unit.
(1) (8) (3) Light 2 output connector

(9) Connect the LED illumination unit of Light 2.
(4) Light 2 Status LED
Indicates the state* of Light 2.
(5) Light 1 output connector
Connect the LED illumination unit of Light 1.
(7) OUT Connector Terminal Block
This is used when wiring a non-Keyence LED illumination
unit directly to the terminal block.
Correctly set the voltage for the illumination

unit on the CA-DC40E illumination
expansion unit. If a 12 V illumination unit is
CAUTION mistakenly connected to the connector
terminal block for which the set voltage has
been changed to 24 V, this may cause a fire,
electric shock, or product malfunction.
Do not use if the Keyence LED light

Point emitter is connected.

This is used when connecting more than one illumination
expansion unit or a communication expansion unit (Page 2-4).

(9) IN Connector Terminal Block

Use this to supply power to the illumination expansion
unit, and to control the forced light off input.
* What the status LED indicates

Point
- Green: The light is enabled in the controller
settings and functioning normally.
- Off: No power is supplied to the controller
or the illumination expansion unit, or the
light is disabled in the controller settings.
- Red: Overcurrent has been detected due to
the connected illumination unit exceeding
the specification rating or a short in the
cable, or voltage is not being correctly
output due to a malfunction in the

Expansion Unit
Terminal Block Interface (CA-DC40E)

The following section details the terminal block specifications for the illumination expansion unit (CA-DC40E).
Point Tightening above the specified torque may cause damage to the terminal block.
OUTPUT connector INPUT connector

• Compatible wires: AWG16 to 28 • Compatible wires: AWG16 to 28
• Terminal block screw torque: 0.25 Nm or less • Terminal block screw torque: 0.25 Nm or less
I/O Interface
L2+ (1)
L2-
COM
IN
(1)
L1+ LOFF
2
L1-
(4)
LOFF
1
24V
DC
0V
FG
(6)
• OUT Connector Terminal Block
Signal
No. Signal Description Description
(terminal block display)
1 LIGHT2+(L2+) + ve terminal for Light 2 Connect the + ve side of light 2.
2 LIGHT2-(L2-) - ve terminal for Light 2 Connect the - ve side of light 2.
3 LIGHT1+(L1+) + ve terminal for Light 1 Connect the + ve side of light 1.
4 LIGHT1-(L1-) - ve terminal for Light 1 Connect the - ve side of light 1.
If a 12 V illumination unit is connected to a terminal block for which the voltage has been set to 24 V, this may
CAUTION cause a fire, electric shock, or product malfunction. Normally, use the standard voltage for Keyence
illumination units, 12 V, which is also the default setting.
If the voltage has been set to 24 V, nothing will be output from the Light 1 Output Connector or the Light 2
Point Output Connector.
• IN Connector Terminal Block
Signal
No. Signal Description Description
(terminal block display)
1 COMIN(COMIN) Common for terminal block inputs Dedicated input common for the IN connector terminal block.
2 LIGHT2_OFF(LOFF2) Forcibly stop lighting input for Used to force the emission of LED illumination unit to off by level
Light 2 synchronized input.
3 LIGHT1_OFF(LOFF1) Forcibly stop lighting input for Used to force the emission of LED illumination unit to off by level
Light 1 synchronized input.
4 24VDC(24VDC) + ve power supply input (24 V DC) Supplies a 24 V power source for the illumination expansion unit.
5 0V(0V) - power supply (0 V) input Connects the 0 V of the 24 V power source for the illumination
expansion unit.
6 FG(FG) frame ground terminal Connect to a Class D ground.
Point The 0 V power supply, COMIN, controller, and other expansion unit commons are all insulated.
Input Circuit Diagram

• Max. applied voltage: 26.4 V
• ON voltage: 19 V or greater 7.5kΩ
LOFF
• ON current: 3 mA or greater
910Ω
• OFF voltage: 5 V or less
COMIN
• OFF current: 1 mA or less

Expansion Unit

(3)
(4)

expansion unit.

I/O Interface
If the light connector is to be removed or

attached, shut off the power supply to the
illumination expansion unit. If the light
NOTICE connector is removed or attached while
power is being supplied, this may cause the
illumination expansion unit and the light
emitter to malfunction or become damaged.



expansion unit or a communication expansion unit (Page 2-4).

(8) Power connector

This is used when connecting a power supply to the

Point
- Green: The light is enabled in the
controller settings and functioning
normally.
- Off: No power is supplied to the
controller or the illumination
expansion unit, or the light is
disabled in the controller settings.
- Red: Breakdown of the illumination
unit or cable disconnection has been
detected, or voltage is not being
correctly output due to a malfunction
in the illumination expansion unit.

Expansion Unit

Power supply connector

• Compatible wires: AWG16 to 28
• Terminal block screw torque: 0.25 Nm or less
24V (1)
0V
I/O Interface
FG
(3)
• Power supply Connector Terminal Block
Signal
No. (terminal block Signal Description Description
display)
1 24VDC(24V) + ve power supply input (24 Supplies a 24 V power source for the illumination expansion unit.
V DC)
2 0V(0V) - power supply (0 V) input Connects the 0 V of the 24 V power source for the illumination expansion
unit.
Point The 0 V power supply, controller, and other expansion unit commons are all insulated.

Expansion Unit

(3)
controller.
(4)
expansion unit.

I/O Interface




expansion unit.

(8) Power connector

This is used when connecting a power supply to the

Point - Green: The light is enabled in the
controller settings and functioning
normally.
- Off: No power is supplied to the
controller or the illumination
expansion unit, or the light is
disabled in the controller settings.
- Red: Breakdown of the illumination
unit or cable disconnection has been
detected.

Expansion Unit

INPUT connector
• Compatible wires: AWG16 to 28
• Terminal block screw torque: 0.25 Nm or less
(1)
I/O Interface
(3)
• Power supply Connector Terminal Block
Signal
No. (terminal block Signal Description Description
display)
1 24VDC(24V) + power supply input (24 V Supplies a 24 V power source for the illumination expansion unit.
DC)
2 0V(0V) - power supply (0 V) input Connects the 0 V of the 24 V power source for the illumination expansion unit.
Point The 0 V power supply, controller, and other expansion unit commons are all insulated.

Input/Output Circuit
Input Connections
Input circuit diagram Example of connections
Circuit A (For F_IN0 to 3 only, EV compatible) When connecting an NPN PLC output to the system input
I/O Interface
7.5kΩ OUT IN
IN
910Ω
COMIN* COMIN*
COM(-)
PLC(NPN output) Input circuit on controller

• ON voltage: 19 V or greater When connecting a PNP PLC output to the system input
• ON current: 2.2 mA or greater
• OFF voltage: 5 V or less IN
• OFF current: 1 mA or less
COM(+)
Circuit B (other inputs)
COMIN*

15kΩ
IN
OUT
2.7kΩ
PLC(PNP output)
COMIN*

• ON voltage: 19 V or greater
• ON current: 1.2 mA or greater
• OFF voltage: 3 V or less
• OFF current: 0.3 mA or less
* The commons which are connected differ according to the IN terminals. The common terminal for IN connectors 2 - 6 is
Point COMIN1, and the common terminal for parallel I/O connectors 2 - 16 is COMIN2.

Output Connections
Output circuit diagram
Circuit C (common for all output terminals)

• Max. applied voltage: 30 V
Poly Switch • Max. sink current: 50 mA
OUT
• Leakage current: 0.1 mA or less
• Residual voltage:
1.4 V or less (50 mA)
I/O Interface
COMOUT*
1.0 V or less (20 mA)
Since this unit utilizes a photo MOSFET in the output elements, any one of the NPN inputs, or PNP inputs is
Point connectable.
Example of connections: When connecting the output from the controller with a positive common
Point If the input instrument is compatible with the NPN open collector outputs, then refer to this connection example.
When connecting the output from the controller to a PLC with a positive common
IN
Poly Switch
OUT
COMOUT*
COM(+)
PLC input circuit positive common Output circuit on controller
When connecting the output from the controller to a relay
Poly Switch
Load
OUT
COMOUT*
* The commons which are connected differ according to the OUT terminals. The common terminal for OUT connectors 1 - 2
Point is COMOUT1, and the common terminal for OUT connectors 3 - 4/6 - 7 is COMOUT_F, and the common terminal for parallel
I/O connectors 18 - 39 is COMOUT2.

Example of connections: When connecting the output from the controller with a negative common
Point If the input instrument is compatible with the PNP open collector outputs, then refer to this connection example.
When connecting the output from the controller to a PLC with a negative common
IN
Poly Switch
OUT
COMOUT*
I/O Interface
COM(-)
PLC input circuit negative common Output circuit on controller
When connecting the output from the controller to a relay
Poly Switch
Load
OUT
COMOUT*
* The commons which are connected differ according to the OUT terminals. The common terminal for OUT connectors 1 - 2
Point is COMOUT1, and the common terminal for OUT connectors 3 - 4/6 - 7 is COMOUT_F, and the common terminal for parallel
I/O connectors 18 - 39 is COMOUT2.

6
Chapter
Specifications and
Optional Devices
Specifications and Optional Devices


Cameras and Connectable Camera Input Unit
Cameras and Connectable Camera Input Unit
List of Cameras and Number of Units Supported by Controller

The figures in the chart are the maximum number of cameras that can be connected to the camera port on the controller,
and the figures in the brackets are the maximum number of cameras that can be connected by using the maximum number
of camera input units.
Camera XG-X2000/X2002 XG-X2200/X2202 XG-X2500/X2502 XG-X2700/ XG-X2800/ XG-X2900/
XG-X2800LJ XG-X2900LJ
connection XG-X1000/X1002*7 XG-X1200/X1202*7 XG-X1500/X1502*7 X2702 X2802 X2902
Area CA-035C/035M, Camera port on 2(4) 2(4) 2(4) 2(4) (4) × (4) ×
camera XG-035C/035M, the controller or
CA-H035C/H035M, CA-E100,
XG-H035C/H035M, CA-E100L*4*5
CA-HS035C/HS035M,
XG-S035C/S035M
CA-H048CX/H048MX, 2(4)*1*7 2(4)*1*7 2(4)*1*7 2(4)*1 (4)*1 × (4)*1 ×
CA-HX048C/HX048M
CA-200C/200M, × 2(4) 2(4) 2(4) (4) × (4) ×
XG-200C/200M,
CA-H200C/H200M,
XG-H200C/H200M,
CA-HS200C/HS200M,
XG-S200C/S200M
CA-H200CX/H200MX, × 2(4)*1*7 2(4)*1*7 2(4)*1 (4)*1 × (4)*1 ×
CA-HX200C/HX200M
CA-H500C/H500M, × × 2(4) 2(4) (4) × (4) ×
XG-H500C/H500M
CA-H500CX/H500MX, × × 2(4)*1*7 2(4)*1 (4)*1 × (4)*1 ×
CA-HX500C/HX500M
CA-H2100C/H2100M × × × 2(4) (4) × (4) ×
XG-H2100C/H2100M
CA-HF2100C/HF2100M CA-E200*4 × × × × (4)*1 × (4)*1 ×
CA-E200L*4*5
CA-HF6400C/HF6400M × × × × × × (4)*1 ×
Line XG-HL02M CA-E100L × × × × (4)*2 × (4)*2 ×
scan
XG-HL04M × × × × (4)*2 × (4)*2 ×
camera
XG-HL08M × × × × (4)*2 × (4)*2 ×
CA-HL02MX CA-E200L × × × × (4)*2 × (4)*1*2 ×
CA-HL04MX × × × × (4)*2 × (4)*1*2 ×
CA-HL08MX × × × × (4)*2 × (4)*1*2 ×
XT XT-024/060 CA-E200T × × × × (2)*2 × (2)*2 ×
Camera
XR XR-HT40M/HT15M CA-E100T × × × × (2)*2 × (2)*2 ×
Camera
LJ-V LJ-V7020/7020K/7060/ CA-E100LJ × × × × (4)*2 *3 (4) *3 (4)*2*3 ×
Series 7060K/7080/7200/7300
CA-E110LJ*6 × × × × (4)*2 *3 (4) *3 (4)*2*3 ×
head
CA-E200LJ*8 × × × × × × × (4)*3
LJ-X LJ-X8020/8060/8080/
Series 8200/8400/8900
head
*1 Supports LumiTrax light and MultiSpectrum light. (The CA-HL**MX only supports Line Light for LumiTrax Specular Reflection Mode.
Furthermore, the CA-HF***** only supports LumiTrax light in 21 megapixel mode or less and in 5 megapixel mode when the XG-
X2800 is connected.)
Furthermore, the CA-H****X is also compatible with pattern projection light.
For details about LumiTrax light, MultiSpectrum light, and pattern projection light, see the XG-X Series User’s Manual.
*2 The line scan camera and the LJ-V Series head cannot be connected at the same time as the XR camera or the XT camera.
Additionally, the line scan camera and LJ-V Series head cannot be used at the same time as an area camera for which LumiTrax
light, MultiSpectrum light, or pattern projection light is enabled.
*3 For one camera input unit, up to two LJ-X/LJ-V Series heads (limited to the same model) can be connected. However, the capture
timing and number of capture lines of the LJ-X/LJ-V Series heads connected to the same camera input unit will be the same.
*4 The CA-E100L/E200/E200L can only be connected to XG-X2800/X2802/X2900/X2902.
*5 In addition to the line scan camera, the area camera can also be connected to the CA-E100L/E200L. In that case, the encoder input
can also be used as a trigger signal.
*6 The CA-E110LJ is a camera input unit that also supports luminance output type LJ-V Series Sensor Heads whose model name ends
with the letter B.
*7 The XG-X1000/X1200/X1500 does not support capture modes other than the normal illumination mode.
*8 Along with LJ-X Series Heads, the CA-E200LJ is a camera input unit that also supports luminance output type LJ-V Series Sensor
Heads whose model names end with the letter B.

List of maximum cable lengths by camera
List of maximum cable lengths by camera
Up to 2 repeaters can be connected in series.

• The following table shows the maximum levels of extension and maximum cable length for each camera.
• Do not exceed the maximum camera cable length and maximum number of extensions allowed.
Supported repeater Max. length

Supported cable model
model No. of repeaters
Camera model
CA- CA-
CA-CH** CA-CN** CA-CF** None One Two
CHX10U CNX10U
CA-035C/035M   17 m 27 m 37 m
CA-200C/200M   10 m 20 m 30 m

CA-H035C/H035M   10 m 20 m 30 m
CA-H048CX/H048MX   10 m 20 m 30 m
CA-H200C/H200M   10 m 20 m 30 m
Unable to
CA-H200CX/H200MX   10 m 20 m
connect
CA-H500C/H500M   10 m 20 m 30 m
Unable to
CA-H500CX/H500MX   10 m 20 m
connect
CA-H2100C/H2100M   10 m 20 m 30 m
CA-HS035C/HS035M   10 m 20 m 30 m
CA-HS200C/HS200M   10 m 20 m 30 m
CA-HX048C/HX048M   10 m 20 m 30 m
Unable to
CA-HX200C/HX200M   10 m 20 m
connect
Unable to
CA-HX500C/HX500M   10 m 20 m
connect
Unable to Unable to
CA-HF2100C/HF2100M  20 m*3
connect connect
Unable to Unable to
CA-HF6400C/HF6400M  20 m*3
connect connect
XG-035C/035M   17 m 34 m 51 m*2
XG-200C/200M   10 m 20 m 30 m
XG-H035C/H035M   10 m 20 m 30 m
Unable to
XG-H200C/H200M   10 m 20 m
connect
Unable to
XG-H500C/H500M   10 m 20 m
connect
XG-H2100C/H2100M   10 m 20 m 30 m
Unable to
XG-S035C/S035M   10 m 20 m
connect
XG-S200C/S200M   10 m 20 m 30 m*1
*1 Connection is not possible when doing a partial capture of less than 1,000 lines.
*2 Connection is not possible when doing a partial capture of less than 350 lines.
*3 The maximum cable length depends on the camera’s setting for the number of occupied channels.
1 channel / 2 channels: 20 m, 4 channels: 10 m

List of Cable Characteristics
List of Cable Characteristics
The connector shape, and cable length and characteristics are listed below.
Select a cable according to the connection condition.
Cable model Connector shape Flexible Environment For For Length

cable -resistant*1 repeater extension
CA-CH CA-CN CA-CF Straight L-shape cable 1m 3m 5m 7 m 10 m 17 m
CA-CH*     
CA-CH*P      
CA-CH*R       
CA-CH*L     
CA-CH*X     
CA-CH*RX       
CA-CH*BE     *4
CA-CH*BEX     *2
CA-CH*BP      
*7
CA-CH*BPE      
CA-CH*BX       
CA-CF*     
CA-CF*L     
CA-CF*E*6     
CA-CN*       
CA-CN*R       
CA-CN*L      
CA-CN*X      
CA-CN*RX       
CA-CN*LX      
CA-CN*RE     *3
CA-CN*BE     *5
*1 The Environment-resistant cable has a protective structure equivalent to the IP64 protection level defined in IEC/EN 60529 only when
correctly connected to an Environment-resistant camera and lens designated by Keyence. For more details, see the User Manual of
the Environment-resistant camera and lens that are going to be used.
*2 The electrical characteristics of CA-CH3BEX are equivalent to a 5 m cable rather than a 3 m cable. Use the cable by converting it to
a 5 m cable within the maximum extension range of the camera to be used.
*3 CA-CN7RE is an extension cable and cannot be used by itself. Connect a CA-CN1/CN3/CN5/CN10/CN3R/CN5R/CN10R/CN3L/CN5L/
CN10L/CN3RX/CN10RX/CN3LX/CN10LX to the controller side connector and then use it within the maximum extension range of the
camera to be used.
*4 CA-CH3BE is an extension cable and cannot be used by itself. Use it with a CA-CH3/CH3R/CH3L/CH3X connected to the controller
side connector. Note that the electrical characteristics are equivalent to a 7 m cable rather than a 3 m cable. Use the cable by
converting it to a 7 m cable within the maximum extension range of the camera to be used.
*5 CA-CN3BE is an extension cable and cannot be used by itself. Use it with a CA-CN3/CN3R/CN3L/CN3X/CN3RX connected to the
controller side connector. Note that the electrical characteristics are equivalent to a 7 m cable rather than a 3 m cable. Use the cable
by converting it to a 7 m cable within the maximum extension range of the camera to be used.
*6 The CA-CF5E/CF10E is an extension cable and cannot be used by itself. Use the extension cable to connect a CA-CF*/CF*L cable to
the controller.
Up to two extension cables can be connected (Ex.: CA-CF5E + CA-CF5E + CA-CF10 = 20 m)
*7 The CA-CH5BPE is an extension cable and cannot be used by itself. Connect the CA-CH*/CH*L to the controller side connector and
use it within the maximum extension range of the camera to be used.

Examples of Cable Connection Between the Controller and a Camera
Examples of Cable Connection Between the Controller

and a Camera
This section shows typical examples of cable connections from the controller to the camera. Check cable models that are
compatible with the camera to be used in "List of maximum cable lengths by camera" (Page 6-3) and use it as a reference
for the system configuration to be used.
Connection Examples (When the CA-CH** Cable is Used)

Connecting with one camera cable
Controller
Camera
Example: XG-X2700
Example:
CA-035C,
Camera cable
Example: CA-CH3, CA-CH10BP etc.
CA-H048MX etc.
Connecting by using one repeater to extend the camera cable

Controller
Example:XG-X2700 Camera
Repeater camera cable Example:
Camera cable Repeater Example: CA-035C,
Example: CA-CH3, CA-CH10BP etc. CA-CHX10U CA-CH10X, CA-CH3BX etc. CA-H048MX etc.
Connecting by using two repeaters to extend the camera cable

Controller
Example:XG-X2700
Repeater camera cable
Camera cable Repeater Example:
Example: CA-CH3, CA-CH10BP etc. CA-CHX10U CA-CH10X, CA-CH3BX etc.
Repeater Repeater camera cable

CA-CHX10U Example:
Camera
CA-CH10X, CA-CH3BX etc.
Example:
CA-035C,
CA-H048MX etc.

Connecting by using a high flex robotic extension cable to extend the camera cable
Controller
Camera
Example:XG-X2700
Example:
CA-035C,
Camera cable Extension camera cable
CA-H048MX etc.
Example: CA-CH3, CA-CH5BP etc. CA-CH5BPE etc.
Connecting by using a high flex robotic extension cable and a repeater to extend the camera cable
Controller
Example:XG-X2700

Example: CA-CH3, CA-CH5BP etc. CA-CH5BPE etc.
Repeater Repeater camera cable

CA-CHX10U Example:
Camera
CA-CH10X, CA-CH3BX etc.
Example:
CA-035C,
CA-H048MX etc.
Connection Examples (When the CA-CF* Cable is Used)
Controller
Example: XG-X2900 + CA-E200
Camera
Camera cable Example: CA-HF2100C, CA-HF6400C etc.
Example: CA-CF3, CA-CF10L etc.
When extending and connecting the camera cable
Controller
Example: XG-X2900 + CA-E200
Camera
Extension cable Camera cable Example: CA-HF2100C,
CA-CF5E, CA-CF10E Example: CA-CF3, CA-CF10 etc. CA-HF6400C etc.

Connection Examples (When the CA-CN** Cable is Used)

Controller Camera
Example:XG-X2700 Example:
XG-035C,
Camera cable XG-200M etc.
Example: CA-CN3, CA-CN10R etc.

Connecting by using one repeater to extend the camera cable
Controller Camera
Repeater camera cable XG-035C,
Camera cable Repeater
Example: XG-200M etc.
Example: CA-CN3, CA-CN10R etc. CA-CNX10U
CA-CN3X, CA-CN10RX etc.
Connecting by using two repeaters to extend the camera cable

Controller
Example:XG-X2700
Repeater camera cable
Camera cable Repeater Example:
Example: CA-CN3, CA-CN10R etc. CA-CNX10U CA-CN3X, CA-CN10RX etc.
Repeater Repeater camera cable Camera

CA-CNX10U Example: Example:
CA-CN3X, CA-CN10RX etc. XG-035C,
XG-200M etc.
Connecting by using a high flex robotic extension cable to extend the camera cable
Controller Camera
XG-035C,
XG-200M etc.
Example: CA-CN3, CA-CN3R etc. CA-CN3BE, CA-CN7RE

Connecting by using a high flex robotic extension cable and a repeater to extend the camera cable
Controller
Example:XG-X2700
Example: CA-CN3, CA-CN3R etc. CA-CN3BE, CA-CN7RE
Repeater Repeater camera cable Camera

CA-CNX10U Example: Example:
CA-CN3X, CA-CN10RX etc. XG-035C,

XG-200M etc.

Field of View and the Working Distance by Camera (FOV Chart)
Field of View and the Working Distance by Camera

(FOV Chart)
List of FOV Charts by Camera

Lens to be used
Camera model Resolution CA-LHL**
CA-LHT** CA-LHE** CA-LHR** CA-LH** CV-L** CA-LHS** CA-LS**
CA-LHW**
640 x 480 - - - - - -
CA-035C/M Page 6-10 Page 6-10
512 x 480 - - - - - -
1600 x 1200 - - - Page 6-11 Page 6-11 Page 6-13 - -

CA-200C/M
1024 x 960 - - - Page 6-12 Page 6-12 Page 6-13 - -
640 x 480 - - - - - -
CA-H035C/M Page 6-10 Page 6-10
512 x 480 - - - - - -
784 x 596 - - - Page 6-15 Page 6-14 - - -
CA-H048CX/MX 640 x 480 - - - - - -
Page 6-15 Page 6-14
512 x 480 - - - - - -
1600 x 1200 - - - Page 6-11 Page 6-11 Page 6-13 - -
CA-H200C/M
1024 x 960 - - - Page 6-12 Page 6-12 Page 6-13 - -
CA-H200CX/MX 1600 x 1200 - - - Page 6-16 Page 6-16 - - -
CA-H500C/M 2432 x 2050 - - - Page 6-17 Page 6-17 - - -
2432 x 2040 - - - Page 6-18 Page 6-18 - - -
CA-H500CX/MX
1600 x 1200 - - - Page 6-16 Page 6-16 - - -
5104 x 4092 - - Page 6-19 - - - - -
CA-H2100C/M
2432 x 2050 - - - Page 6-17 Page 6-17 - - -
640 x 480 - - - - - - -
CA-HS035C/M Page 6-24
512 x 480 - - - - - - -
1600 x 1200 - - - - - - Page 6-25 -
CA-HS200C/M
1024 x 960 - - - - - - Page 6-25 -
784 x 596 - - - Page 6-15 Page 6-14 - - -
CA-HX048C/M 640 x 480 - - - - - -
Page 6-15 Page 6-14
512 x 480 - - - - - -
CA-HX200C/M 1600 x 1200 - - - Page 6-26 Page 6-26 - - -
2432 x 2040 - - Page 6-27 - - - - -
CA-HX500C/M
1600 x 1200 - - - Page 6-26 Page 6-26 - - -
CA-HF2100C/M 5104 x 4092 - Page 6-20 Page 6-20 - - - - -
2432 x 2050 - - - Page 6-21 Page 6-21 - - -
CA-HF6400C/M 8192 x 7808 Page 6-22 Page 6-23 - - - - -
7168 x 5768 Page 6-22 - Page 6-23 - - - - -
640 x 480 - - - - - -
XG-035C/M Page 6-28 Page 6-28
512 x 480 - - - - - -
1600 x 1200 - - - Page 6-29 Page 6-29 Page 6-31 - -
XG-200C/M
1024 x 960 - - - Page 6-30 Page 6-30 Page 6-31 - -
640 x 480 - - - - - -
XG-H035C/M Page 6-28 Page 6-28
512 x 480 - - - - - -
1600 x 1200 - - - Page 6-29 Page 6-29 Page 6-31 - -
XG-H200C/M
1024 x 960 - - - Page 6-30 Page 6-30 Page 6-31 - -
XG-H500C/M 2432 x 2050 - - - Page 6-17 Page 6-17 - - -
5104 x 4092 - - Page 6-19 - - - - -
XG-H2100C/M
2432 x 2050 - - - Page 6-17 Page 6-17 - - -
640 x 480 - - - - - - -
XG-S035C/M Page 6-24
512 x 480 - - - - - - -
1600 x 1200 - - - - - - Page 6-32 -
XG-S200C/M
1024 x 960 - - - - - - Page 6-32 -

Environment resistant 0.35 megapixel camera (CA-035C/035M) /

High-speed, environment resistant 0.35 megapixel camera (CA-H035C/H035M)
• The numerical numbers shown in the FOV chart are typical values. Fine adjustment is needed during
Point installation.
• If a close-up ring is used, the inherent peripheral resolution performance of the lens may not be satisfied.
When a high-resolution lens (CA-LH*(G/P)) is used
(1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

1000 (7)
(8)
(9)
100
0.5 0.5
0.5 1.0 5
Y: Field 0.5 1.5
of view 1.5 1.0
1.5 10
(mm) 1.5 1.0 5 15
5
10 20
5 10
10 5 10 30
20
40
15 20
20 40 60
30
60 100
1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) CA-LH4 (2) CA-LH5P (3) CA-LH8(G/P) (4) CA-LH12(G/P) (5) CA-LH16(G/P) (6) CA-LH25(G/P)
When a standard lens (CV-L*) is used
(1) (2) (3) (4)

1000 (5)
(6)
100 0.5
1.5
1.0
0.5 1.5
Y: Field 1.5 1.5
5
of view 0.5
1.0
(mm) 5
10
5
5
10 15
10 10 20
15
10 30
15 20
20 40
50
30
1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) CV-L3 (2) CV-L6 (3) CV-L16 (4) CV-L25 (5) CV-L35 (6) CV-L50

Environment resistant 2 megapixel camera (CA-200C/200M) /

High-speed, environment resistant 2 megapixel camera (CA-H200C/H200M)
Point installation.
When a high-resolution lens (CA-LH*(G/P)) is used with 1600 × 1200 pixels (2 megapixel mode)
(1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

1000
(9)

100 0.5 0.5
0.5 1.0 5
0.5 1.5
1.5 1.0 1.5 10
Y: Field 1.5 1.0 5 15
of view 5
10 20
(mm) 5 10
5 10 30
20
15 40
10 20
20 60
30 40
60 100
1
10 100 1000 10000
When an ultra high-resolution lens (CA-LHR*) is used with 1600 × 1200 pixels (2 megapixel mode)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

1000
100
0.5
0.5
1.0 0.5
Y: Field 1.5 1.0
1.5
of view 1.5
(mm) 5
5
10
10 10
20
1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) CA-LHR5 (2) CA-LHR8 (3) CA-LHR12 (4) CA-LHR16 (5) CA-LHR25 (6) CA-LHR35 (7) CA-LHR50

(1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

1000 (8)
(9)
100
0.5 0.5
0.5 1.0 5
0.5 1.5
Y: Field 1.5 1.0 10
1.5
of view 1.5 1.0 5
5 15
(mm) 10 20
5 10
5 10 30
10 20
15 40
20
20 60
30 40
60 100
1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

1000 (7)
100
0.5
0.5
Y: Field 1.0 0.5
of view 1.5 1.5
1.0
(mm) 1.5
5
5
10 10
10
20
1
10 100 1000 10000

When a standard lens (CV-L*) is used with 1600 × 1200 pixels (2 megapixel mode)
(1) (2) (3) (4)

1000
0.5 1.5
100
1.0
1.5
1.5 1.5
5
Y: Field 5
of view 5 10
(mm) 5 15
10
10 20
15
10 30
10 15 20
20 40
50
30

1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) CV-L16 (2) CV-L25 (3) CV-L35 (4) CV-L50
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

1000 (6)
0.5 1.5
100
1.0 1.5
0.5
1.5 1.5
5
Y: Field 0.5
1.0
of view 5
10
(mm) 5
5
10 15
10 20
10 15
10 30
15 20
20 40
50
30
1
10 100 1000 10000

High-speed, high-functioning 0.47 megapixel camera (CA-H048CX/H048MX) /

0.47 megapixel camera (CA-HX048C/HX048M)
Point installation.
When a high-resolution lens (CA-LH*(G/P)) is used with 784 × 596 pixels (0.47 megapixel mode)
(1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

1000 (7)
(8)
(9)
100
0.5 0.5
Y: Field 0.5 1.0
1.5
5
0.5
of view 1.5
1.0 1.5 10
(mm)
1.5 1.0 5
5 15
10 20
10 5 10
5 10 30
20
40
15 20
20 40 60
30
60 100
1
10 100 1000 10000
When a high-resolution lens (CA-LH*(G/P)) is used with 640 × 480 pixels (0.31 megapixel mode) or
512 × 480 pixels (0.24 megapixel mode)
(1)(2) (3) (4) (5)

1000 (6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
100
0.5
Y: Field 0.5
0.5 1.0 5
of view 0.5 1.5
(mm) 1.5
1.0 1.5 10
1.5 1.0 5
5 15
10 10 20
5 10
5 10 30
20
15 40
20
20 60
30 40
60 100
1
10 100 1000 10000

When an ultra high-resolution lens (CA-LHR*) is used with 784 × 596 pixels (0.47 megapixel mode)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

1000 (6)
(7)
100
Y: Field 0.5
of view 0.5
1.0 0.5
(mm) 1.0
1.5 1.5
1.5
10 5
5
10
10

20
1
10 100 1000 10000
When an ultra high-resolution lens (CA-LHR*) is used with 640 × 480 pixels (0.31 megapixel mode) or
512 × 480 pixels (0.24 megapixel mode)
(1) (2) (3) (4)

1000 (5)
(6)
(7)
100
Y: Field
of view 0.5
0.5
(mm) 1.0 0.5
1.5 1.0
1.5
10 1.5
5
5
10
10
20
1
10 100 1000 10000

High-speed, high-functioning 2 megapixel camera (CA-H200CX/H200MX)

Point installation.
The following charts are the same for a High-speed, high-functioning 5 megapixel camera (CA-H500CX/H500MX)
Reference using 1600 x 1200 resolution (in 2 megapixel mode).
(1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

1000 (8)
(9)
100
0.5 0.5
0.5 1.0 5
1.5
0.5
Y: Field 1.5 1.0 10
1.5
of view 1.5 1.0 5 15
(mm) 5
10 20
5 10
5 10 30
10 20
40
15 20
20 30 40 60
60
100
1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

1000 (7)
100
0.5
0.5
Y: Field
1.0 0.5
of view 1.5 1.0
1.5
(mm) 1.5
5
5
10 10
10
20
1
10 100 1000 10000

High-speed, environment resistant 5 megapixel camera (CA-H500C/H500M)/

High-speed, 5 megapixel camera (XG-H500C/H500M)
Point installation.
The following charts are the same for a 21 megapixel camera (CA-H2100C/H2100M, XG-H2100C/H2100M) using 2432
Reference x 2050 resolution (in 5 megapixel mode).
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

1000 (8)

0.5 0.5
100 0.5 1.0 1.5 5
1.5 1.0 10
1.5
1.5 1.0 5
Y: Field 5
15
20
of view 5 10
10
(mm) 5 10 30
20 40
15 20
10 20 60
30 40
60 100
1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) CA-LH5P (2) CA-LH8(G/P) (3) CA-LH12(G/P) (4) CA-LH16(G/P) (5) CA-LH25(G/P)
The standard lens (CV-L) cannot be used with a high-speed 5 megapixel camera (XG-H500C/H500M) due to
Point vignetting.
When an ultra high-resolution lens (CA-LHR*) is used
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

1000
100 0.5
0.5
1.0 0.5
1.5 1.0
Y: Field 1.5
1.5
of view 5
(mm) 5
10
10
10 20
1
10 100 1000 10000

High-speed, high-functioning 5 megapixel camera (CA-H500CX/H500MX)

Point installation.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

1000 (8)
0.5 0.5
100 0.5 1.0 1.5 5
1.5 1.0 10
1.5
1.5 1.0 5
Y: Field 5
15
10 20
of view 5 10
(mm) 5 10
20
30
40
15 20
10 20 60
30 40
60 100
1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

1000
100 0.5
0.5
1.0 0.5
1.5 1.0
Y: Field 1.5
1.5
of view 5 5
(mm)
10
10
10 20
1
10 100 1000 10000
See "High-speed, high-functioning 2 megapixel camera (CA-H200CX/H200MX)" (Page 6-16) for using the1600 × 1200
Reference pixels (2 megapixel mode).

21 megapixel camera (CA-H2100C/H2100M, XG-H2100C/H2100M)

Point installation.
When a 4/3"-compatible, ultra high-resolution lens (CA-LHE*) is used with 5104 × 4092 pixels (21 megapixel mode)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

1000
0.5

100 0.5
1.0 1.5
1.5 5
5
5
10
Y: Field 10
of view 20
(mm)
10
1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) CA-LHE12 (2) CA-LHE16 (3) CA-LHE25 (4) CA-LHE35 (5) CA-LHE50
See "High-speed, environment resistant 5 megapixel camera (CA-H500C/H500M)/ High-speed, 5 megapixel camera
Reference (XG-H500C/H500M)" (Page 6-17) for using the 2432 × 2050 pixels (5 megapixel mode).

High-speed 21 megapixel camera (CA-HF2100C/HF2100M)

Point installation.
When a 4/3"-compatible high-resolution lens (CA-LHE*) is used with 5104 × 4092 pixels (21 megapixel
mode)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

1000
0.5
100 1.0
0.5 1.5
1.5 1.0
1.5 5 5
5
Y: Field 10
5.0 10 x0.25
of view 10 20
(mm) (6)
20 30 x0.5
40
x0.75
10 x1.0
1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) CA-LHE12 (2) CA-LHE16 (3) CA-LHE25 (4) CA-LHE35 (5) CA-LHE50 (6) CA-LM0210
When a 1-inch lens (CA-LHW*) is used with 5104 × 4092 pixels (21 megapixel mode)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

1000
0.5t
0.5t
1.0t
1.0t
100 1.5t
5t
1.5t
x0.25
Y: Field
of view
(mm) x0.5
(7)
x0.75
x1.0
10
1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) CA-LHW8 (2) CA-LHW12 (3) CA-LHW16 (4) CA-LHW25 (5) CA-LHW35 (6) CA-LHW50
(7) CA-LM0210

When an ultra-high-resolution lens (CA-LHR*) is used with 2432 × 2050 pixels (5 megapixel mode)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

1000
100
0.5
0.5
Y: Field 0.5
1.0
of view 1.5 1.0
1.5
(mm) 1.5
5
5
10
10 10
20

1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) CA-LHR5 (2) CA-LHR8 (3) CA-LHR12 (4) CA-LHR16 (5) CA-LHR25 (6) CA-LHR35
(7) CA-LHR50
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

1000
(8)
0.5 0.5
100 1.0
0.5
1.5 5
Y: Field 1.5
10
1.5
of view 1.5 1.0 1.0
5 5 15
(mm) 10 20
5 10
5 10 30
20
15 40
10 20
20 60
30 40
60 100
1
10 100 1000 10000

64 megapixel camera (CA-HF6400C/HF6400M)

Point installation.
When a 2-inch high-resolution lens (CA-LHT*) is used with 8192 × 7808 pixels (64 megapixel mode)
(1) (2) (3)

1000
100
x0.25
Y: Field x0.5
of view
x0.75
(mm)
x1.0
(4)
10
1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) CA- LHT18 (2) CA- LHT25 (3) CA- LHT35 (4) CA- LML0210
When a 2-inch high-resolution lens (CA-LHT*) is used with 7168 × 5768 pixels (41 megapixel mode)
(1) (2) (3)

1000
100
x0.25
Y: Field
of view x0.5
(mm)
x0.75
(4) x1.0
10
1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) CA- LHT18 (2) CA- LHT25 (3) CA- LHT35 (4) CA- LML0210

When a 2-inch lens (CA-LHL*) is used with 8192 × 7808 pixels (64 megapixel mode)
(1) (2) (3)

1000
100
x0.25
(4)
Y: Field
x0.5
of view
x0.75
(mm)
x1.0
10

1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) CA-LHL16 (2) CA-LHL25 (3) CA-LHL35 (4) CA-LML0210
When a 4/3"-compatible high-resolution lens (CA-LHE*) is used with 7168 × 5768 pixels (41 megapixel
mode)
When using the CA-LHE or other such C-mount lenses with the CA-HF6400C/HF6400M, the mount on the
Point camera must be replaced with a C-mount adapter (OP-88578, sold separately) (64 megapixel mode is not
supported). For details, see the CA-HF6400C/HF6400M Instruction Manual.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

1000
0.5
1.0 0.5
100 1.5 1.0 1.5
1.5 5
5
5
5.0 10
Y: Field
10 10
of view
20 20
(mm)
30
40
10
1
10 100 1000 10000

High-speed, small 0.31 megapixel camera (CA-HS035C/HS035M)/

Ultra small 0.31 megapixel camera (XG-S035C/S035M)
When a small camera dedicated standard lens (CA-LS*) is used
(1) (2) (3) (4)

1000
100
Y: Field
of view
5
(mm)
5 10
10
15
10 20
15 30
50
1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) CA-LS4 (2) CA-LS6 (3) CA-LS16 (4) CA-LS30

High-speed, small 2 megapixel camera (CA-HS200C/HS200M)

When a small camera dedicated high-resolution lens (CA-LHS*) is used with 1600 × 1200 pixels (2 megapixel mode)
(1) (2) (3)

1000 (4)
100

5
Y: Field
of view 10
5
(mm)
5 15
10 20
10
10 15 30
20
50
30
70
50 100
150
1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) CA-LHS8 (2) CA-LHS16 (3) CA-LHS25 (4) CA-LHS50
(1) (2) (3)

1000
(4)
100
Y: Field 5
of view
(mm) 5 10
15
5
10 10 20
10 15 30
20
30 50
70
50
100
150
1
10 100 1000 10000

2 megapixel camera (CA-HX200C/HX200M)

The following charts are the same for a High-speed, high-functioning 5 megapixel camera (CA-HX500C/HX500M)
Reference using 1600 x 1200 resolution (in 2 megapixel mode).
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

1000 (8)
100 0.5 0.5

0.5 1.0 5
1.5
1.5 1.0 1.5 10
Y: Field 1.5 1.0 5 15
5
of view 10 20
(mm) 5 10
5 10 30
20
15 20 40
10 20 60
30 40
60 100
1
10 100 1000 10000
The standard lens (CV-L) cannot be used with a high-speed 2 megapixel camera (CA-HX200C/HX200M) due to
Point vignetting.
When an ultra high-resolution lens (CA-LHR*) is used
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

1000
100
0.5
0.5
1.0 0.5
Y: Field 1.5 1.5
1.0
of view 1.5
(mm) 5
5
10
10
10
20
1
10 100 1000 10000

5 megapixel camera (CA-HX500C/HX500M)

When a 4/3"-compatible, ultra high-resolution lens (CA-LHE*) is used with 2432 × 2040 pixels (5 megapixel mode)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

1000
0.5
100

0.5
1.0 1.5
Y: Field 1.5 5 5
5
of view 10
10
(mm) 20
10
1
10 100 1000 10000
See "2 megapixel camera (CA-HX200C/HX200M)" (Page 6-26) for using the 1600 × 1200 pixels (2 megapixel mode).
Reference

0.31 megapixel camera (XG-035C/035M) /

High-speed, 0.31 megapixel camera (XG-H035C/H035M)
(1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

1000
(8)
(9)
100
0.5 0.5
0.5 1.0 5
1.5
Y: Field 0.5
1.5
of view 1.0 1.5 10
1.5 1.0 5
(mm) 5
15
10 20
5 10
10 5 10
20
30
40
15 20
20 40 60
30
60 100
1
10 100 1000 10000
When a standard lens (CV-L*) is used
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

1000
(6)
100 0.5
1.5
1.0
0.5 1.5
1.5 1.5
Y: Field 5
0.5
of view 1.0
5
(mm) 5
10
5 15
10
10 10
15
20
10 15 20 30
20 40
50
30
1
10 100 1000 10000

2 megapixel camera (XG-200C/200M) /

High-speed, 2 megapixel camera (XG-H200C/H200M)
(1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

1000
(9)

100 0.5 0.5
0.5 1.0 5
1.5
0.5
1.5
1.0 10
Y: Field 1.5
1.5 1.0 5
of view 5 15
10 20
(mm) 5 10
5 10 30
20
40
10 15 20
20 40 60
30
60 100
1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

1000
100
0.5
0.5
Y: Field 1.0 0.5
1.5 1.0
1.5
of view 1.5
(mm) 5
5
10
10 10
20
1
10 100 1000 10000

(1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

1000 (8)
(9)
100
0.5 0.5
0.5 1.0 5
1.5
0.5
Y: Field 1.5 1.0 10
of view 1.5
1.5 1.0 5
5 15
(mm) 10 20
5 10
5 10 30
10 20
40
15 20
20 60
30 40
60 100
1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

1000 (7)
100
0.5
0.5
Y: Field 0.5
1.0
of view 1.5 1.0
1.5
(mm) 1.5
5
5
10 10
10
20
1
10 100 1000 10000

(1) (2) (3) (4)

1000
0.5 1.5
100 1.5
1.0
1.5 1.5
5
Y: Field 5
of view 5 10
(mm) 5 15
10
10 20
15
10
10 15 20 30
20 40
50
30

1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) CV-L16 (2) CV-L25 (3) CV-L35 (4) CV-L50
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

1000 (6)
0.5
100 1.5
1.0
0.5 1.5
1.5 1.5
5
Y: Field 0.5
1.0
of view 5
10
(mm) 5
5 15
10
10 20
10 15
10 15 20 30
20 40
50
30
1
10 100 1000 10000

Small 2 megapixel camera (XG-S200C/XG-S200M)

(1) (2) (3) (4)

1000
100
Y: Field 5
of view
5
(mm) 5 10
15
10 20
10 10
15 30
20
50
30
70
50 100
150
1
10 100 1000 10000
(1) (2) (3)

1000 (4)
100
Y: Field
5
of view
(mm)
5 5 10
15
10 10
20
10
15 30
20
50
30
70
50 100
150
1
10 100 1000 10000
• For more information on installing and adjusting small cameras, refer to the instruction manual provided with
Point the camera.
• When attaching the side view attachment OP-66833, subtract the internal optical path length of 25.8 mm from
the working distance.

Main Specifications
Main Specifications
The actual number of settings available for all items listed depends on the total amount of available memory in the
Important
Point system.
Controller Unit
(XG-X2900/X2902/X2800/X2802/X2700/X2702/X2500/X2502/X2200/X2202/
X2000/X2002)

XG-X2900/X2902 XG-X2800/X2802 XG-X2700/X2702 XG-X2500/X2502 XG-X2200/X2202 XG-X2000/X2002
Camera input*1 • No camera input on the controller • 2 color/monochrome cameras
• With area camera input unit CA-E100/ • With area camera input unit CA-E100 connected: up to 4 color/monochrome
E200 connected: 2 color/ cameras can be connected
monochrome cameras per CA-E100
or 1 CA-HF color/monochrome
camera per CA-E200, up to 4
cameras via a maximum of 2 units
can be connected
• With line scan camera input unit CA-
E100L connected: 2 line scan
cameras or 2 color/monochrome
cameras per one CA-E100L, up to 4
cameras via a maximum of 2 units
can be connected
• With high-speed line scan camera
input unit CA-E200L connected: 2
high-speed line scan cameras or 1
CA-HF color/monochrome camera
per CA-E200L, up to 4 cameras via a
maximum of 2 units can be
connected
• With XT camera input unit CA-E200T
connected: 1 XT camera per CA-
E200T, up to 2 cameras via a
connected
• With XR camera input unit CA-E100T
connected: 1 XR camera per CA-
E100T, up to 2 cameras via a
connected
• With LJ-V input unit CA-E100LJ/CA-
E110LJ connected: 2 identical
models of the LJ-V series heads per
one CA-E100LJ/E110LJ, up to 4
heads via a maximum of 2 units can
be connected
Trigger input Can select from simultaneous/individual Can select from simultaneous/individual capture with up to 4 cameras. (when CA-
capture with up to 4 cameras/head (when E100 is not connected, simultaneous capture is by up to 2 cameras)
1 camera input unit is connected,
simultaneous capture is performed with up
to 2 cameras/head)*2
Supported cameras/ Area camera • With CA-035C/035M/H035M/H035C/HS035C/HS035M connected
Number of pixels 310 k pixel mode: 640(H) x 480(V), approx. 310,000 pixels
240 k pixel mode: 512(H) x 480(V), approx. 240,000 pixels
• With XG-035C/035M/S035C/S035M/H035C/H035M connected
• With CA-H048CX/H048MX/HX048C/HX048M connected
• With CA-200C/200M/H200C/H200M/HS200C/HS200M connected
2 mega-pixel mode: 1600(H) x 1200(V), approx. 1.92 mega-pixels
1 mega-pixel mode: 1024(H) x 960(V), approx. 980,000 pixels
• With CA-H500C/H500M connected
• With XG-H500C/H500M connected

Main Specifications

Supported cameras/ • With CA-H2100C/H2100M, XG-H2100C/H2100M connected
Number of pixels 21 mega-pixel mode: 5104(H)x4092(V),
(Continued) approx. 20.89 mega-pixels
5 mega-pixel mode: 2432(H)x2050(V),
approx. 4.99 mega-pixels
• With CA-HF2100C/HF2100M connected
• With CA-
HF6400C/
HF6400M
connected
64 mega-pixel
mode:8192(H)x
7808(V), approx.
64 mega-pixels
41 mega-pixel
mode:7168(H)x
5768(V), approx.
41 mega-pixels
21 mega-pixel
mode:
5104(H)×4092(V),
approx. 21 mega-
pixel
Line scan • With XG-HL08M connected
camera 8192(H) x 8192(L), approx. 67.11 mega-pixels
• With XG-HL04M connected
4096(H) x 16384(L), approx. 67.11 mega-pixels
• With XG-HL02M connected
High-speed • With CA-HL08MX connected
Line scan 8192(H) x 8192(L), approx. 67.11 mega-pixels
camera • With CA-HL04MX connected
• With CA-HL02MX connected
XT camera • XT-024/060 3072(H).3072(V),
XR camera • With XR-HT40M connected
2048(H) x 2048(V), approx. 4.19 mega-pixels
• With XR-HT15M connected
1408(H) x 1408(V), approx. 1.98 mega-pixels
LJ-V Series • With LJ-V7020/7020K/7060/7060K/
head*3 7080/7200/7300 connected
Main image processor DSP (High-speed) DSP
Number of program setting SD cards 1 and 2 can each hold 1000 programs (depending on the size of the SD card and the size of the programs)
registrations External switching is possible
Number of registered screens Maximum of 1000 screens per camera for each program (depending on SD card size), Image compression function, position
adjusted image registration and partial image registration supported, external switching via variable referencing possible.
SD card • SD card slot x 2
• Compatible with • Compatible with OP-87133 (512 MB), CA-SD1G (1 GB: • Compatible with OP-87133 (512 MB:
OP-87133 installed standard to SD1 slot), CA-SD4G (4 GB), and CA- installed standard to SD1 slot),
(512 MB), CA- SD16G (16 GB) CA-SD1G (1 GB), CA-SD4G (4 GB),
SD1G (1 GB), and CA-SD16G (16 GB)
CA-SD4G (4 GB:
installed
standard to SD1
slot), and CA-
SD16G (16 GB)
Interface Controlled input • 20 inputs (including four high speed inputs designed for trigger input)
(compatible with arbitrary • Input rating 26.4 V or lower, 1.2 mA or greater (2.2 mA or greater for high speed input terminal)
assignment)
Controlled output • 28 outputs (including four high speed outputs designed for FLASH outputting linked to external trigger)
(compatible with arbitrary • Photo MOSFET *4 Maximum 50 mA (30 V or less)
assignment)
Encoder input • When connecting CA-E100L/E200L, 2
systems per 1 unit, up to 4 systems
via a maximum of 2 units
• When connecting CA-E100LJ/
E110LJ, 1 system per 1 unit, up to 2
systems via a maximum of 2 units
• RS-422 line-driver output (5 V output
supplied: maximum 150 mA, multi-
drop compatible in the case of the
CA-E100L/E200L), combined use as
open collector output (CA-E100L/
E200L is for 24 V compatible
components)
Monitor output Analog RGB Output, XGA (1024 x 768, 24 bit color)
Operation indicators LED display for Power ON and ERROR

Main Specifications

Interface RS-232C • Can be switched to be used for performing numerical value output and control input/output, or be used for the CA series
(continued) touch panel interface function (Cannot be used with PLC-Links using the RS-232C port)
• Supports a max. baud rate of up to 230400 bps
PLC link • Can output numerical values and perform control input/output using the Ethernet or RS-232C port (Cannot be used
in conjunction with CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, and EtherCAT.)
• The following PLCs are supported via link unit:*5
- KEYENCE: KV-8000/7000/5000/3000/1000/700 Series, KV Nano Series
- Mitsubishi Electric: MELSEC iQ-R/L/Q Series, MELSEC A Series (RS-232C only), MELSEC iQ-F Series, MELSEC FX Series
(RS-232C only)
- OMRON: SYSMAC CJ2/CJ1/CS1/CP1 Series, SYSMAC C Series (RS-232C only)
- YASKAWA Electric Corporation: MP2000 Series, MP900 Series (RS-232C only)
Ethernet • Numerical value output, and control input/output possible.
• By the connection of KEYENCE PC application software, in addition to the function described above, uploading and
downloading of program settings, simulations, sending/receiving of various data, including image data, and remote
desktop are possible.
• Supports FTP client, FTP server, and SFTP client functions.
• Supports VNC server function (for clients other than for PC it will be only for the screen display).
• Supports BOOTP function.
• 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
• Supports jumbo frames (when the CA-NEC20E/NEP20E/NPN20E is connected)

USB • By the connection of KEYENCE PC application software, in addition to numerical value output and control input/output,
uploading and downloading of program settings, simulations, sending/receiving of various data, including image data, and
remote desktop are possible.
• USB2.0
CC-Link • By connecting the optional CC-Link unit CA-NCL20E, numerical value output and control input/output are possible.
(Cannot be used in conjunction with PLC Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, and EtherCAT)
• Compatible to the Ver.1.10 remote device station, Ver.2.00 remote device station
EtherNet/IP • Can perform numerical value input/output and control input/output using the Ethernet port or optional EtherNet/IP
unit CA-NEP20E. (Cannot be used in conjunction with PLC Link, CC-Link, PROFINET, and EtherCAT)
• Compatible to the cyclic communication (max.1436 byte), and message communication
• Maximum number of connections 32 (ETHERNET)/1: Exclusive Owner, 4: Input Only (CA-NEP20E)
• Compliant with the conformance test Version.CT15 (ETHERNET)/CT16 (CA-NEP20E)
PROFINET • Can perform numerical value input and control input/output using the Ethernet port or optional PROFINET unit CA-
NPN20E. (Cannot be used in conjunction with PLC Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, and EtherCAT)
• Compatible to the cyclic communication (max. 1408 byte (ETHERNET)/max. 1248 byte (CA-NPN20E))
• Compatible to the aperiodic (recorded data) communication
• Compliant with the Conformance Class A (ETHERNET)/C (CA-NPN20E)
EtherCAT • By connecting the optional EtherCAT unit CA-NEC20E, numerical value output and control input/output can be
performed (Cannot be used in conjunction with PLC Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, and PROFINET)
• Compatible to the cyclic communication (process data object communication) (input: max. 536 byte/output: max.
532 byte)
• Compatible to the noncyclic communication (mailbox communication)
• Compatible to CoE
• Explicit Device Identification
• Compliant with the conformance test V2.1.0.2
SNTP By connecting to an SNTP server, the date and time of the controller can be automatically adjusted.
USB Console • By the optional USB handheld controller (OP-87983), various menus can be operated
• Supports operation assignment settings to the handheld controller buttons
Mouse Possible to control various menus via an optional dedicated mouse (OP-87506)
Touch Panel • Setting operation from the CA Series touch panel used by the RS-232C port is possible (When RS-232C is used, the
nonprocedural communication and PLC-Links that use the RS-232C port cannot be used.)
• Supports the dedicated touch menu and the operation buttons
USB HDD By connecting a HDD (maximum 2 TB) to the dedicated USB port (USB 3.0 compliant and bus powered compatible:
rated output 900 mA), various kinds of data including image data can be output
VisionDataStorage By connecting the optional VisionDataStorage to either the Ethernet port, or the USB HDD port via the dedicated USB
cable (OP-88263: optional), various kinds of data including image data can be output.
Display language Japanese/English/Simplified Chinese/Traditional Chinese/German selectable (Choose the default language to be used
when the controller is started up for the very first time)
Illumination control By connecting the optional illumination expansion unit CA-DC40E/DC50E/DC60E, the lighting and light intensity of the
LED illumination can be controlled.*6
Cooling fan Cooling fan unit CA-F100 is standard equipment None
Rating Power source voltage 24 VDC±10%
Consumption current 5.3 A 3.8 A 3.1 A
Environmental Ambient operating 0 to +45°C (DIN rail mounted)/0 to +40°C (Bottom mounted)
resistance temperature
Ambient operating 85% RH or less (no condensation)
humidity
Weight Approx. 1750 g Approx. 1800 g Approx. 1600 g
*1 As XG-X2900/X2902/X2800/X2802 controllers do not support camera input, at least one camera input unit (optional) is required.
*2 Simultaneous capture is always used with LJ-V Series heads connected to the same LJ-V input unit, so two LJ-V input units are
required for individual capture.
*3 LJ-V Series heads whose model ends in "B" are luminance output types. To connect a luminance output type, the XG-X2800/X2802/
X2900/X2902 and the CA-E110LJ are required.
*4 Both positive common connecting which is compatible with NPN input instruments and negative common connecting which is
compatible with PNP input instruments are possible.
*5 Models equipped with the Ethernet port in the CPU unit also support Ethernet port direct connection.
*6 Connect up to 8 illumination expansion units (note that the eight units can include only a maximum of two CA-DC50E units and two
CA-DC60E units).

Main Specifications
Controller Unit (XG-X1500/X1502/X1200/X1202/X1000/X1002)

The following functions are not supported by the XG-X1000 series.
• Various Capture Modes • Other functions
- LumiTrax Mode - Robot Vision
- LumiTrax Specular Reflection Mode - Color Grouping
- MultiSpectrum Mode - Defect Extraction Operation
- 3D Capture Mode - Image Stitching
- Profile Capture Mode - Multi-Camera Image Variables
• Functions related to 3D-compatible cameras and line
scan cameras
NOTICE - Height Measurement
- Profile Measurement
- Continuous Profile Measurement
- Linescan Calibration
- Target Classification
- Encoder Monitor
- Encoder Pulse Count
- 3D Observation
- 3D Geometry
- 3D Comparison
XG-X1500/X1502 XG-X1200/X1202 XG-X1000/X1002

Camera input • 2 color/monochrome area cameras (mixed connection possible)
• With area camera input unit CA-E100 connected: up to 4 color/monochrome cameras can be connected
Trigger input Can select from simultaneous/individual capture with up to 4 cameras (while the CA-E100 is disconnected, simultaneous
capture is performed with up to 2 cameras)
Supported cameras/ • With CA-035C/035M/H035M/H035C/HS035C/HS035M connected
Number of pixels 310 k pixel mode: 640(H) x 480(V), approx. 310,000 pixels
• With CA-200C/200M/H200C/H200M/HS200C/HS200M connected
• With CA-H500C/H500M connected
5 mega-pixel mode:
2432(H) x 2050(V),
• With XG-H500C/H500M connected
5 mega-pixel mode:
2432(H) x 2050(V),
• With CA-H500CX/H500MX/HX500C/
HX500M connected
5 mega-pixel mode:
2432(H) x 2040(V),
2 mega-pixel mode:
1600(H) x 1200(V),
Main image processor DSP
Number of program setting SD cards 1 and 2 can each hold 1000 programs (depending on the size of the SD card and the size of the programs)
registrations External switching is possible
Number of registered screens Maximum of 1000 screens per camera for each program (depending on SD card size), Image compression function, position
adjusted image registration and partial image registration supported, external switching via variable referencing possible.
SD card • SD card slot x 2
• Compatible with OP-87133 (512 MB), Compatible with OP-87133 (512 MB: installed standard to SD1 slot),
CA-SD1G (1 GB: installed standard to CA-SD1G (1 GB), CA-SD4G (4 GB), and CA-SD16G (16 GB)
SD1 slot), CA-SD4G (4 GB), and CA-
SD16G (16 GB)
Interface Controlled input • 20 inputs (including four high speed inputs designed for trigger input)
(compatible with • Input rating 26.4 V or lower, 1.2 mA or greater (2.2 mA or greater for high speed input terminal)
arbitrary assignment)
Controlled output • 28 outputs (including four high speed outputs designed for FLASH outputting linked to external trigger)
(compatible with • Photo MOSFET*1 Maximum 50 mA (30 V or less)
arbitrary assignment)

Main Specifications
XG-X1500/X1502 XG-X1200/X1202 XG-X1000/X1002

Interface Monitor output Analog RGB Output, XGA (1024 x 768, 24 bit color)
(Continued)
Operation indicators LED display for Power ON and ERROR
RS-232C • Can be switched to be used for performing numerical value output and control input/output, or be used for the CA series
touch panel interface function (Cannot be used with PLC-Links using the RS-232C port)
• Supports a max. baud rate of up to 230400 bps
PLC link • Can output numerical values and perform control input/output using the Ethernet or RS-232C port (Cannot be used in
conjunction with CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, and EtherCAT.)
• The following PLCs are supported via link unit:*2
- KEYENCE: KV-8000/7000/5000/3000/1000/700 Series, KV Nano Series
- Mitsubishi Electric: MELSEC iQ-R/L/Q Series, MELSEC A Series (RS-232C only), MELSEC iQ-F Series,
MELSEC FX Series (RS-232C only)
- OMRON: SYSMAC CJ2/CJ1/CS1/CP1 Series, SYSMAC C Series (RS-232C only)
- YASKAWA Electric Corporation: MP2000 Series, MP900 Series (RS-232C only)
Ethernet • Numerical value output, and control input/output possible.
• By the connection of KEYENCE PC application software, in addition to the function described above, uploading and
downloading of program settings, simulations, sending/receiving of various data, including image data, and remote desktop
are possible.
• Supports FTP client, FTP server, and SFTP client functions.

• Supports VNC server function (for clients other than for PC it will be only for the screen display).
• Supports BOOTP function.
• 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
• Supports jumbo frames (when the CA-NEC20E/NEP20E/NPN20E is connected)
USB • By the connection of KEYENCE PC application software, in addition to numerical value output and control input/output,
uploading and downloading of program settings, simulations, sending/receiving of various data, including image data, and
remote desktop are possible.
• USB2.0
CC-Link • By connecting the optional CC-Link unit CA-NCL20E, numerical value output and control input/output are possible.
(Cannot be used in conjunction with PLC Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, and EtherCAT)
• Compatible to the Ver.1.10 remote device station, Ver.2.00 remote device station
EtherNet/IP • Can perform numerical value input/output and control input/output using the Ethernet port or optional EtherNet/IP unit
CA-NEP20E. (Cannot be used in conjunction with PLC Link, CC-Link, PROFINET, and EtherCAT)
• Compatible to the cyclic communication (max.1436 byte), and message communication
• Maximum number of connections 32 (ETHERNET)/1: Exclusive Owner, 4: Input Only (CA-NEP20E)
• Compliant with the conformance test Version.CT15 (ETHERNET)/CT16 (CA-NEP20E)
PROFINET • Can perform numerical value input and control input/output using the Ethernet port or optional PROFINET unit
CA-NPN20E. (Cannot be used in conjunction with PLC Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, and EtherCAT)
• Compatible to the cyclic communication (max. 1408 byte (ETHERNET)/max. 1248 byte (CA-NPN20E))
• Compatible to the aperiodic (recorded data) communication
• Compliant with the Conformance Class A (ETHERNET)/C (CA-NPN20E)
EtherCAT • By connecting the optional EtherCAT unit CA-NEC20E, numerical value output and control input/output can be
performed (Cannot be used in conjunction with PLC Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, and PROFINET)
• Compatible to the cyclic communication (process data object communication) (input: max. 536 byte/output: max. 532 byte)
• Compatible to the noncyclic communication (mailbox communication)
• Compatible to CoE
• Explicit Device Identification
• Compliant with the conformance test V2.1.0.2
SNTP By connecting to an SNTP server, the date and time of the controller can be automatically adjusted.
USB Console • By the optional USB handheld controller (OP-87983), various menus can be operated
• Supports operation assignment settings to the handheld controller buttons
Mouse Possible to control various menus via an optional dedicated mouse (OP-87506)
Touch Panel • Setting operation from the CA Series touch panel used by the RS-232C port is possible (When RS-232C is used, the
nonprocedural communication and PLC-Links that use the RS-232C port cannot be used.)
• Supports the dedicated touch menu and the operation buttons
USB HDD By connecting a HDD (maximum 2 TB) to the dedicated USB port (USB 3.0 compliant and bus powered compatible:
rated output 900 mA), various kinds of data including image data can be output
VisionDataStorage By connecting the optional VisionDataStorage to either the Ethernet port, or the USB HDD port via the dedicated USB
cable (OP-88263: optional), various kinds of data including image data can be output.
Display language Japanese/English/Simplified Chinese/Traditional Chinese/German selectable (Choose the default language to be used
when the controller is started up for the very first time)
Illumination control By connecting the optional illumination expansion unit CA-DC40E/DC50E, the lighting and light intensity of the LED
illumination can be controlled.*3
Cooling fan None
Rating Power source voltage 24 VDC±10%
Consumption current 3.8 A 3.1 A
humidity
Weight Approx. 1600 g
*1 Both positive common connecting which is compatible with NPN input instruments and negative common connecting which is
compatible with PNP input instruments are possible.
*2 Models equipped with the Ethernet port in the CPU unit also support Ethernet port direct connection.
*3 Connect up to 8 illumination expansion units (note that the eight units can include only a maximum of two CA-DC50E units).

Main Specifications
Illumination Expansion Unit (CA-DC40E)

CA-DC40E
Output Illumination control (1) Rated voltage (DC)
(2) Pulse width modulation (light emission frequency 100 kHz) (Controller selectable.)
Intensity level 1024 digital levels (controller selectable)
Lighting 2 channels (Connector or terminal block connection)*1
connections
Voltage*1 12 VDC/24 VDC (controller selectable)
Capacity Max. 30 W (2 channels total: 40 W)*2
Synchronization FLASH output synchronization/continuous illumination (controller selectable)
Response speed (1) Rated voltage control: 3 ms or less
(2) Pulse width modulation control: 1 ms or less
Inputs Force illumination 2 channels Individual control (Rated voltage: 26.4 V or less, 2 mA or more)
OFF
Display LED display Power display
Light status display (separate for the 2 channels)
Rating Power supply 24 VDC ±10%
voltage
Current 3A
consumption
resistance*3 temperature
humidity
*1 Output only from the terminal block when switched to 24 V

*2 The total for all units for simultaneous lighting when multiple illumination expansion units are connected is 80 W or less.
*3 The environmental resistance of just the LED lights is ambient temperature 0 to +40°C and ambient humidity 65% RH or less (no
condensation).

CA-DC50E
Output Illumination control Constant current control
No. of connections 2 channels (dedicated Six-pole circular connector)
Synchronization Synchronized with trigger applied to camera and with shutter (continuous lighting not supported)*1
Response speed Within 1 ms
voltage
Current 5A
consumption
humidity
*1 If the light-on time of the connected illumination unit is too long compared with the light-off time, an error may occur due to overload.
In such a case, adjust the trigger intervals or shutter speed on the controller so that the light-off time of the unit is three times or more
longer than the light-on time.
condensation).

Main Specifications
CA-DC60E
Output Illumination control Constant current control
No. of connections 2 channels (dedicated 12-pole circular connector)
Synchronization Synchronization with trigger applied to camera and with shutter/continuous lighting*1 (the setting can
be switched on the controller)
Response speed Within 1 ms
voltage

Current 5.1 A (including current supplied to the illumination unit)
consumption
humidity
*1 For CA-DRMX, it is possible to make a setting for continuous lighting (unicolor omnidirectional lighting) only when the volume limitation
function is active.
condensation).
Area Camera Input Unit (CA-E100)

CA-E100
Camera input *1 2 (Area camera only)
Supported CA-H2100C/H2100M, CA-H500CX/H200CX/H048CX/H500MX/H200MX/H048MX, CA-HX500C/
cameras *1 HX200C/HX048C/HX500M/HX200M/HX048M, CA-H500C/200C/HS200C/H200C/035C/HS035C/
H035C/H500M/200M/HS200M/H200M/035M/HS035M/H035M, XG-H500C/200C/S200C/H200C/035C/
S035C/H035C/H500M/200M/S200M/H200M/035M/S035M/H035M
Power supply Supplied from the controller
humidity
*1 The models that can actually be used differ depending on the combination with the connected controller.
Area Camera Input Unit (CA-E200)

CA-E200
1
Camera input * 2 (Area camera only)
Supported cameras *1 CA-HF6400C/HF6400M/HF2100C/HF2100M
humidity

Main Specifications
High-Speed Line Scan Camera Input Unit (CA-E200L)

CA-E200L
1
Camera input * 2 (High-speed line scan camera, 64-megapixel / high-speed 21-megapixel area
camera only)
Supported cameras *1 CA-HL08MX/HL04MX/HL02MX, CA-HF6400C/HF6400M/HF2100C/HF2100M
Programmable encoder input 2 systems: RS-422 line-driver output (multi-drop compatible, 5 V output supplied:
max. 150 mA), open collector output (for 24 V compatible components; rated
input: 26.4 V or less, 3 mA or more)
Response RS-422 • Single phase / Z-phase 1.6 MHz
frequency • 2-phase, 1-multiplication 1.6 MHz
• 2-phase, 2-multiplication 3.2 MHz
• 2-phase, 4-multiplication 6.4 MHz
Open collector (OC) • Single phase / Z-phase 100 KHz
• 2-phase, 1-multiplication 100 KHz

Accessory RS-422 terminating resistance (110 Ω 1/2 W, quantity: 6)
Environmental Ambient operating temperature 0 to +45°C (DIN rail mounted)/0 to +40°C (Bottom mounted)
resistance
Ambient operating humidity 85% RH or less (no condensation)
CC-Link Unit (CA-NCL20E)

CA-NCL20E
Communication CC-Link station type Ver.1.10 remote device station/Ver.2.00 remote device station
Communication speed 156 kbps, 625 kbps, 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps
Connection cable Ver.1.10 compatible CC-Link cable
FANC-110SBH, FA-CBL200PSBH, CS110, OP-79426, OP-79427
Max. total cable length 156 kbps:1200 m / 625 kbps:900 m / 2.5 Mbps:400 m / 5 Mbps:160 m / 10 Mbps:100 m
(Max. communication distance)
resistance Ambient operating humidity 85% RH or less (no condensation)
EtherCAT Unit (CA-NEC20E)

CA-NEC20E
Communication Compliant standard IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
Communication cycle 500 μs at the shortest
Connection cable STP type cable of category 5e or higher
Distance between nodes 100 m
Communication port RJ-45 x 2

Main Specifications
EtherNet/IP Unit (CA-NEP20E)

CA-NEP20E
Communication cycle 1 ms at the shortest

PROFINET Unit (CA-NPN20E)
CA-NPN20E
Communication cycle 1 ms at the shortest
Cameras (CA-035C/035M)
CA-035C CA-035M
Image receiving element Color CMOS Square lattice 2x speed reading Monochrome CMOS Square lattice 2x speed reading
Unit cell size 6.9 μm × 6.9 μm
Image size Equivalent to 1/3-inch
Number of effective pixels In 0.31 megapixel mode: 640 (H) × 480 (V)
In 0.24 megapixel mode: 512 (H) × 480 (V)
Scanning system Progressive
In 0.31 megapixel mode: 16.5 ms
Pixel transfer frequency 25 MHz
Transfer system Digital serial transfer
Electronic shutter 1/15, 1/30, 1/60, 1/120, 1/240, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/5000, 1/10000, 1/20000
By using number input, the values 0.05 msec to 9000 msec can also be specified.
Lens mount C-mount
Enclosure rating IP64*1
Environmental Ambient operating 0 to +50°C
Ambient operating 85%RH or less (no condensation)
humidity
Weight Approx. 75 g (lens not included)
*1 A KEYENCE-specified IP64-compatible lens and environment resistant cable must be mounted on the product.

Main Specifications
Cameras (CA-200C/200M)
CA-200C CA-200M
Image receiving element Color CMOS Square lattice 2x speed reading Monochrome CMOS Square lattice 2x speed reading
Image size Equivalent to 1/1.8-inch
Number of effective pixels In 2 megapixel mode: 1600 (H) × 1200 (V)
In 1 megapixel mode: 1024 (H) × 960 (V)
In 2 megapixel mode: 56.5 ms
Lens mount C-mount
humidity
Cameras (CA-H035C/H035M)
CA-H035C CA-H035M
Image receiving element Color CMOS Square lattice 7x/16x speed Monochrome CMOS Square lattice 7x/16x speed
reading reading
In 0.31 megapixel mode In 0.24 megapixel mode
• At 7x transfer speed: 4.8 ms*1 • At 7x transfer speed: 4.8 ms*1
Pixel transfer frequency At 7x transfer speed: 86 MHz (43 MHz × 2)*1
At 16x transfer speed: 198 MHz*2
Lens mount C-mount
humidity
*1 Transfer speed setting: Standard

*2 Transfer speed setting: Fast

Main Specifications
Cameras (CA-H048CX/H048MX)
CA-H048CX CA-H048MX
Image receiving element Color CMOS Square lattice 16x speed reading Monochrome CMOS Square lattice 16x speed
reading
• In 0.47 megapixel mode: 2.9 ms

Lens mount C-mount
humidity
CA-H200C CA-H200M
reading reading
Image size Equivalent to 1/1.8-inch
In 2 megapixel mode In 1 megapixel mode
Lens mount C-mount
humidity


Main Specifications
CA-H200CX CA-H200MX
reading
Number of effective pixels 1600 (H) × 1200 (V)
Scanning system Progressive (11.7 ms)
Electronic shutter 1/15, 1/30, 1/60, 1/120, 1/240, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/5000, 1/10000, 1/20000, 1/50000
Lens mount C-mount

humidity
CA-H500C CA-H500M
Image receiving element Color CMOS Square lattice 11x/16x speed Monochrome CMOS Square lattice 11x/16x
reading speed reading
Number of effective pixels 2432 (H) × 2050 (V)
At 11x transfer speed: 61.2 ms*1
At 16x transfer speed: 28.4 ms*2
Lens mount C-mount
humidity


Main Specifications
CA-H500CX CA-H500MX
reading
Scanning system Progressive Progressive
In 5 megapixel mode: 29.2 ms In 5 megapixel mode: 27.7 ms

Electronic shutter 1/15, 1/30, 1/60, 1/120, 1/240, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/5000, 1/10000, 1/20000, 1/50000
Lens mount C-mount
humidity
Cameras (CA-H2100C/H2100M, XG-H2100C/H2100M)

CA-H2100C/XG-H2100C CA-H2100M/XG-H2100M
Image receiving element 4/3-inch Color CMOS image receiving element 4/3-inch Monochrome CMOS image receiving element
Square-lattice all-pixel 16x speed reading Square-lattice all-pixel 16x speed reading
Unit cell size 3.5μm×3.5μm
Effective pixels In 21 megapixel mode: 5104 (H) ×4092 (V)
In 21 megapixel mode: 110 ms
Image transfer frequency 195 MHz
0.05 ms to 9000 ms can be set through manual input
Lens mount C-mount
humidity

Main Specifications
Cameras (CA-HS035C/HS035M)
CA-HS035C CA-HS035M
Camera/Amplifier CA-HS035CH/CA-HS035CU CA-HS035MH/CA-HS035MU
reading
Unit cell size 7.4 μm×7.4 μm
Pixel transfer frequency 86 MHz (43 MHz × 2)

Lens mount Special mount
(M10.5 P0.5 male)
humidity
Weight Camera Approx. 135 g (cable included, lens not included)
Amplifier Approx. 60 g
CA-HS200C CA-HS200M
reading reading
In 2 megapixel mode In 2 megapixel mode
Lens mount Special mount (M15.5 P0.5 male)
humidity


Main Specifications
Cameras (CA-HX048C/HX048M)
CA-HX048C CA-HX048M
Unit cell size 4.8 μm x 4.8 μm
Number of effective pixels In 470-k pixel mode 784 (H) x 596 (V)
In 310-k pixel mode 640 (H) x 480 (V)
In 240-k pixel mode 512 (H) x 480 (V)
In 470-k pixel mode: 2.9 ms

Can specify from 0.022 to 1000 ms through numerical value input
Lens mount C-mount
humidity
CA-HX200C CA-HX200M
Unit cell size 5 μm × 5 μm
Number of effective pixels 1600 (H) x 1200 (V)
Scanning system Progressive (11.6 ms)
Electronic shutter 1/15, 1/30, 1/60, 1/120, 1/240, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/5000, 1/10000, 1/20000, 1/50000, 1/100000
Lens mount C-mount
humidity

Main Specifications
CA-HX500C CA-HX500M
Image receiving element 1-inch Color CMOS image receiving element 1-inch Monochrome CMOS image receiving element
Unit cell size 5 μm x 5 μm
Number of effective pixels In 5 megapixel mode: 2432 (H) × 2040 (V),
In 5-megapixel mode: 27.6 ms In 5-megapixel mode: 26.6 ms
In 2-megapixel mode: 11.6 ms In 2-megapixel mode: 11.6 ms
Electronic shutter 1/15, 1/30, 1/60, 1/120, 1/240, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/5000, 1/10000, 1/20000, 1/50000, 1/100000

Lens mount C-mount
humidity
Cameras (CA-HF2100C/HF2100M)
Model CA-HF2100C CA-HF2100M
Image receiving element Color CMOS Monochrome CMOS
Square-lattice Square-lattice
85x speed reading 85x speed reading
Unit cell size 2.5 μm×2.5 μm
Image size Equivalent to 1-inch (ø16 mm)*1
Number of effective pixels In 21 megapixel mode: 5104 (H)×4092 (V)
In 5 megapixel mode: 2432 (H)×2050 (V)
Scanning system*2 Progressive
In 21-megapixel mode: 20.2 ms
In 5-megapixel mode: 10.8 ms
Pixel transfer frequency 1038 MHz 1037 MHz
Lens mount C-mount
humidity
*1 Equivalent to 1/2-inch (ø8 mm) in 5 megapixel mode.

*2 Transfer times vary depending on the set number of occupied channels.
(Unit: ms)
1ch 2ch 4ch
CA-HF2100C 21 megapixel mode 83.2 39.4 20.2
5 megapixel mode 23.6 10.8 -
CA-HF2100M 21 megapixel mode 83.2 39.3 20.2
5 megapixel mode 23.5 10.8 -

Main Specifications
Cameras (CA-HF6400C/HF6400M)
Model CA-HF6400C CA-HF6400M
Image receiving element Color CMOS Monochrome CMOS
Square lattice Square lattice
88x speed reading 90x speed reading
Image size Equivalent to 2-inch (ø32 mm)*1
In 64 megapixel mode: 59.2 ms (6400C)/57.6 ms (6400M)

Pixel transfer frequency 1085 MHz 1110 MHz
Can specify from 0.05 msec to 9000 msec through numerical value input
Lens mount Special mount (M40 P0.75 male)*3
humidity
*1 Equivalent to 4/3-inch (ø23 mm) in 41 megapixel mode and to 1-inch (ø16 mm) in 21 megapixel mode.
*2 Transfer times vary depending on the set number of occupied channels.
(Unit: ms)
1ch 2ch 4ch
CA-HF6400C 64 megapixel mode 244.1 117.2 59.2
41 megapixel mode 160.0 74.7 40.4
21 megapixel mode 83.3 39.2 28.9
CA-HF6400M 64 megapixel mode 238.5 114.1 57.6
41 megapixel mode 156.8 74.6 40.4
21 megapixel mode 83.2 39.2 28.9
*3 C-mount lenses can be used by replacing the lens mount with a C-mount adapter (OP-88578, sold separately) (64 megapixel mode not
supported).

Main Specifications
Cameras (XG-035C/035M)
XG-035C XG-035M
Image receiving element 1/3-inch Color CCD image receiving element, 1/3-inch Monochrome CCD image receiving
Square-lattice all-pixel 2x speed reading element, Square-lattice all-pixel 2x speed reading
(In standard mode, 240,000 pixels (512 x 480) of the 320,000 pixels, or 310,000 pixels (640 x
480), are used as the process area.)
In 0.31 megapixel mode: 16.0 ms In 0.31 megapixel mode: 16.0 ms
Interlace
Interlace is a binning process which sums the

odd lines and even lines.
Pixel transfer frequency 24.5 MHz
Lens mount C-mount
humidity
XG-200C XG-200M
Image receiving element 1/1.8-inch Color CCD image receiving element, 1/1.8-inch Monochrome CCD image receiving
Square-lattice all-pixel reading element, Square-lattice all-pixel reading
(In the 1 megapixel mode, 980,000 pixels (1024 x 960) of the 1,920,000 pixels are the process
area.)
Interlace
Lens mount C-mount
humidity

Main Specifications
Cameras (XG-H035C/H035M)
XG-H035C XG-H035M
Image receiving element 1/3-inch Color CCD image receiving element 1/3-inch Monochrome CCD image receiving element
Square-lattice all-pixel 7x speed reading (2 outputs) Square-lattice all-pixel 7x speed reading (2 outputs)
(In standard mode, 240,000 pixels (512 x 480) of the 310,000 pixels, or else all 310,000 pixels (640 x
Interlace

Interlace is a binning process which sums the odd
lines and even lines.
Pixel transfer frequency 80 MHz (40 MHz x 2 ch)
Lens mount C-mount
humidity
XG-H200C XG-H200M
Image receiving element 1/1.8-inch Color CCD image receiving element 1/1.8-inch Monochrome CCD image receiving element
(In the 1 megapixel mode, 980,000 pixels (1024 x 960) of the 1,920,000 pixels are the process area.)
Interlace
Lens mount C-mount
humidity

Main Specifications
XG-H500C XG-H500M
Image receiving element 2/3-inch Color CCD image receiving element 2/3-inch Monochrome CCD image receiving element
(2 outputs) (2 outputs)
Scanning system Progressive (61.2 ms) Progressive (61.2 ms)
Interlace (40.3 ms)
Lens mount C-mount
humidity
Cameras (XG-S035C/S035M)
XG-S035C XG-S035M
Camera/Amplifier XG-S035CH/XG-S035CU XG-S035MH/XG-S035MU
Image receiving element 1/3-inch Color CCD image receiving element, 1/3-inch Monochrome CCD image receiving
Square-lattice all-pixel 2x speed reading element, Square-lattice all-pixel 2x speed reading
(In standard mode, 240,000 pixels (512 x 480) of the 320,000 pixels, or 310,000 pixels (640 x
Scanning system Progressive (16.0 ms) Progressive (16.0 ms)
Interlace (8.8 ms)
Pixel transfer frequency 24.5 MHz
Environmental Ambient operating • Head: 0 to +50°C
resistance temperature • Amplifier: 0 to +40°C
humidity
Weight • Head: approx. 160 g
(cable included, lens not included)
• Amplifier: approx. 70 g

Main Specifications
Cameras (XG-S200C/S200M)
XG-S200C XG-S200M
Camera/Amplifier XG-S200CH/XG-S200CU XG-S200MH/XG-S200MU
Image receiving element 1/1.8-inch Color CCD image receiving element, 1/1.8-inch Monochrome CCD image receiving
Square-lattice all-pixel reading element, Square-lattice all-pixel reading
(In the 1 megapixel mode, 980,000 pixels (1024 x 960) of the 1,920,000 pixels are the process
area.)
Interlace

Environmental Ambient operating Head: 0 to +40°C
resistance temperature Amplifier: 0 to +40°C (+35°C or less when using partial capture of 50 lines or less)
humidity
Weight Head: approx. 210 g
(cable included, lens not included)
Amplifier: approx. 70 g

Main Specifications
Camera Cables (CA-CH** Series)

For information about cameras that can be connected, see "List of maximum cable lengths by camera" (Page 6-3).
Reference
Standard type (CA-CH**) High flex robotic extension type (CA-CH3BE)
Model Cable length Weight • The CA-CH3BE is an extension cable and

CA-CH3 3m 290 g cannot be used by itself. This is used by
CA-CH5 5m 440 g connecting CA-CH3/CH3R/CH3L/CH3X to
CA-CH10 10 m 880 g the connector on the controller side.
• CA-CH3BE is comparable to a 7 m cable,
NOTICE not a 3 m cable due to the electric
High flex robotic type (CA-CH**R) characteristics. Use this within the range
of the maximum extension of the camera

Model Cable length Weight that is used by converting it by
CA-CH3R 3m 250 g calculation to a 7 m cable.
CA-CH5R 5m 410 g
CA-CH10R 10 m 740 g Model Cable length Weight
CA-CH17R* 17 m 1300 g CA-CH3BE 3m 280 g
* CA-CH17R can only be connected to CA-035C/035M.

Environment resistant type (CA-CH**P)
L-shaped connector type (CA-CH**L) Model Cable length Weight
CA-CH3P 3m 250 g
Model Cable length Weight CA-CH10P 10 m 750 g
CA-CH3L 3m 270 g
CA-CH5L 5m 450 g
CA-CH10L 10 m 810 g Environment resistant and high flex robotic type
(CA-CH**BP)
Model Cable length Weight

CA-CH5BP 5m 440 g
CA-CH10BP 10 m 840 g
Environment resistant and high flex robotic

extension type (CA-CH5PE)

CA-CH5BPE 5m 440 g
Camera Cables (CA-CF** Series)
Standard type (CA-CF**) Extension type (CA-CF**E)
Model Cable length Weight • The CA-CF5E/CF10E is an extension

CA-CF3 3m 230 g cable and cannot be used by itself. Use
CA-CF5 5m 360 g the extension cable to connect a CA-CF*/
CA-CF10 10 m 680 g CF*L cable to the controller. Up to two
extension cables can be connected (Ex.:
NOTICE CA-CF5E + CA-CF5E + CA-CF10 = 20 m)
L-shaped connector type (CA-CF**L) • The maximum cable length depends on
the camera’s setting for the number of
occupied channels. 1 channel / 2
channels: 20 m, 4 channels: 10 m
CA-CF3L 3m 240 g
CA-CF5L 5m 370 g
CA-CF10L 10 m 690 g
CA-CF5E 3m 370 g
CA-CF10E 10 m 690 g

Main Specifications
Camera Cables (CA-CN** Series)

Reference
Standard type (CA-CN**) Extension Cable (CA-CN7RE)
Model Cable length Weight The CA-CN7RE is an extension cable and

CA-CN1 1m 100 g cannot be used by itself.
Connect a CA-CN1/CN3/CN5/CN10/CN3R/
CA-CN3 3m 220 g
CN5R/CN10R/CN3L/CN5L/CN10L/CN3RX/
CA-CN5 5m 330 g NOTICE CN10RX/CN3LX/CN10LX to the controller
CA-CN10 10 m 660 g side connector and then use it within the
CA-CN17* 17 m 1100 g maximum extension range of the camera to

be used.
High flex robotic type (CA-CN**R) Model Cable length Weight

CA-CN7RE 7 m extension 500 g
CA-CN3R 3m 240 g
Extension Cable: High flex robotic type (CA-CN3BE)
CA-CN5R 5m 310 g
CA-CN10R 10 m 720 g • The CA-CN3BE is an extension cable and
CA-CN17R* 17 m 1190 g cannot be used by itself. This is used by
connecting a CA-CN1/CN3/CN5/CN10/
CN3R/CN5R/CN10R/CN3L/CN5L/CN10L/
L-shaped connector type (CA-CN**L) CN3RX/CN10RX/CN3LX/CN10LX to the
connector on the controller side and then
Model Cable length Weight using it within the maximum extension
NOTICE range of the camera to be used.
CA-CN3L 3m 220 g • CA-CN3BE is comparable to a 7 m cable,
CA-CN5L 5m 340 g not a 3 m cable due to the electric
CA-CN10L 10 m 660 g characteristics. Use this within the range
of the maximum extension of the camera
CA-CN17L* 17 m 1100 g that is used by converting it by
* CA-CN17/CN17R/CN17L can only be connected to XG-035C/035M. calculation to a 7 m cable.

CA-CN3BE 3m 250 g

Main Specifications
Camera Cable Extension Repeater (CA-CHX10U/CNX10U)

Model name CA-CHX10U CA-CNX10U
Supported cameras • CA-035C/035M • XG-035C/035M
• CA-200C/200M • XG-S035C/S035M
• CA-H035C/H035M • XG-200C/200M
• CA-H048CX/H048MX • XG-S200C/S200M
• CA-H200C/H200M
• CA-H200CX/H200MX
• CA-H500C/H500M
• CA-H500CX/H500MX
• CA-H2100C/H2100M
• CA-HS035C/HS035M
• CA-HS200C/HS200M
• CA-HX048C/048M
• CA-HX200C/200M
• CA-HX500C/500M
• XG-H035C/H035M
• XG-H200C/H200M
• XG-H500C/H500M
• XG-H2100C/H2100M
Environmental Ambient operating 0 to +40°C • When connected to XG-035C/035M: 0 to +50°C
resistance temperature • When connected to other cameras: 0 to +40°C
humidity
Outside dimensions 112.6 (W) x 26 (D) x 21 (H)
Weight Approx. 60 g
Connect the camera cable (CA-CN**X/CA-CH**X) (Page 6-57) especially made for the repeater compatible with
Point the camera to be used to the camera side connector on the repeater unit. No other camera cables can be
directly connected to the camera side connector on the repeater.
Controller current consumption when a repeater is connected

The rated current consumption of the repeater is 0.12 A per unit. The current consumption of the controller that supplies
power through the camera cable to the repeaters increases by this amount for each connected repeater.

Main Specifications
Camera Cable for the Repeater (CA-CH** Series)

If the camera to be connected to the repeater is compatible with the CA-CH** Series cable, connect the camera
Important
Point cable (CA-CH**X) especially made for the repeater to the camera side connector on the repeater unit. No other
camera cables can be directly connected to the camera side connector on the repeater.
Standard type (CA-CH**X) High flex robotic type (CA-CH**RX/CA-CH3BEX)
Model Cable length Weight CA-CH3BEX is comparable to a 5 m cable,

CA-CH3X 3m 270 g not a 3 m cable due to the electric
characteristics. Use this within the range of
CA-CH10X 10 m 820 g NOTICE the maximum extension of the camera that
is used by converting it by calculation to a
5 m cable.

CA-CH3BX 3m 280 g
CA-CH5BX 5m 440 g
CA-CH10BX 10 m 840 g
CA-CH3RX 3m 240 g
CA-CH5RX 5m 380 g
CA-CH10RX* 10 m 740 g
CA-CH3BEX 3m 280 g
* This cannot be used for purposes of using a camera attached

to a robot.
Camera Cable for the Repeater (CA-CN** Series)

If the camera to be connected to the repeater is compatible with the CA-CN** Series cable, connect the camera
Important
Point cable (CA-CN**X) especially made for the repeater to the camera side connector on the repeater unit. No other
camera cables can be directly connected to the camera side connector on the repeater.
Standard type (CA-CN**X) L-shaped connector type (CA-CN**LX)
Model Cable length Weight Model Cable length Weight

CA-CN3X 3m 200 g CA-CN3LX 3m 210 g
CA-CN10X 10 m 600 g CA-CN10LX 10 m 610 g
CA-CN17X 17 m 990 g CA-CN17LX 17 m 1000 g
High flex robotic type (CA-CN**RX)

CA-CN3RX 3m 190 g
CA-CN10RX 10 m 540 g
CA-CN17RX 17 m 900 g

Dimensions
Dimensions
Controller Unit (XG-X2900/X2902/X2800/X2802/X2700/X2702/X2500/X2502/

X2200/X2202/X2000/X2002/X1500/X1502/X1200/X1202/X1000/X1002)
XG-X2900/X2902/X2800/X2802
145.7
19.3
118 141.6
DIN-rail
mounts
168
35.9
139.2
83.3
65.3
6
124.6
M4 M4
Depth:6 Depth:6
12.5
93
M4 M4
Depth:6 Depth:6
94
12.1
111.8
Unit: mm

Dimensions
XG-X2700/X2702
145.7
19.3
118 141.6
DIN-rail
mounts
168
139.2 35.9
83.3
65.3

124.6
M4 M4
Depth:6 Depth:6
12.5
93
M4 M4
Depth:6 Depth:6
94 12.1
111.8
Unit: mm

Dimensions
XG-X2500/X2502/X2200/X2202/X2000/X2002/X1500/X1502/X1200/X1202/X1000/X1002
122
19.3
118 141.6
DIN-rail
mounts
168
35.9
83.3
65.3
6
(90) 124.6
M4 M4
Depth:6 Depth:6
12.5
93
M4 M4
Depth:6 94 Depth:6
12.1
Unit: mm

Dimensions
With camera input unit CA-E100 and illumination expansion unit CA-DC40E installed
XG-X2000 + CA-E100 + CA-DC40E
185.8
181.8
149.9 141.6
118 40
DIN-rail
mounts
168
35.9
83.3

65.3
(90) 124.6
Unit: mm
(Total weight: approx. 2650 g)
XG-X2700 + CA-E100 + CA-DC40E
209.5
181.8
149.9 141.6
118 40
DIN-rail
mounts
168
35.9
139.2
83.3
65.3
(90) 124.6
Unit: mm
With camera input unit CA-E200 and communication expansion unit CA-DC40E installed
XG-X2900/X2800 + CA-E200 + CA-DC40E
231.1
203.4 141.6
171.5
118 40
DIN-rail
mounts
168
35.9
139.2
83.3
65.3
6
80 124.6
Unit: mm

Dimensions
XG-X2000 + CA-E100 + CA-DC50E
185.8
181.8
149.9
141.6
118 60
DIN-rail
mounts
168
35.9
83.3
65.3
(90) 124.6
Unit: mm
XG-X2700 + CA-E100 + CA-DC50E

209.5
181.8
149.9
141.6
118 60
DIN-rail
mounts
168
35.9
139.2
83.3
65.3
(90) 124.6
Unit: mm
XG-X2900/X2800 + CA-E100 + CA-DC50E

209.5
181.8
149.9
141.6
118 60
DIN-rail
mounts
168
35.9
139.2
83.3
65.3
(90) 124.6
Unit: mm

Dimensions
XG-X2000 + CA-E100 + CA-DC60E
185.8
181.8 141.6
149.9 90
118
DIN-rail
mounts
168
35.9
83.3
65.3

6
90 124.6
Unit: mm
XG-X2700 + CA-E100 + CA-DC60E

209.5
181.8 141.6
149.9 90
118
DIN-rail
mounts
168
35.9
139.2
83.3
65.3
6
90 124.6
Unit: mm
XG-X2900/X2800 + CA-E200 + CA-DC60E

231.1
203.4 141.6
171.5
118 90
DIN-rail
mounts
168
35.9
139.2
83.3
65.3
6
80
124.6
Unit: mm

Dimensions
With camera input unit CA-E100 and CC-Link Unit CA-NCL20E installed
XG-X2000 + CA-E100 + CA-NCL20E
185.8
181.8
149.9 141.6
118
DIN-rail
mounts
168
35.9
83.3
65.3
(90) 124.6
Unit: mm
XG-X2700 + CA-E100 + CA-NCL20E
209.5
181.8
149.9 141.6
118
DIN-rail
mounts
168
35.9
139.2
83.3
65.3
(90) 124.6
Unit: mm
With camera input unit CA-E200 and CC-Link unit CA-NCL20E installed
XG-X2900/X2800 + CA-E200 + CA-NCL20E
231.1
171.5 141.6
118 80
DIN-rail
mounts
168
35.9
139.2
83.3
65.3
124.6
単位：mm
Unit: mm
Dimensions
With camera input unit CA-E100 and a communication expansion unit (CA-NEC20E/NEP20E/NPN20E) installed
XG-X2000 + CA-E100 + CA-NEC20E/NEP20E/NPN20E
185.8
181.8
149.9 141.6
118
DIN-rail
mounts
168
35.9
83.3

65.3
（90） 124.6
Unit: mm

XG-X2700 + CA-E100 + CA-NEC20E/NEP20E/NPN20E
209.5
181.8
149.9 141.6
118
DIN-rail
mounts
168
35.9
139.2
83.3
65.3
（90） 124.6
Unit: mm
With camera input unit CA-E200 and a communication expansion unit (CA-NEC20E/NEP20E/NPN20E) installed
XG-X2900/X2800 + CA-E200 + CA-NEC20E/NEP20E/NPN20E
231.1
171.5 141.6
118 80
DIN-rail
mounts
168
35.9
139.2
83.3
65.3
124.6
単位：mm
Unit: mm

Dimensions
With camera input unit CA-E100/illumination expansion unit CA-DC40E/DC50E/DC60E/CC-Link Unit CA-NCL20E
installed
XG-X2700 + CA-E100 + CA-DC40E x4 + CA-DC50E x2 + CA-DC60E x2 + CA-NCL20E
464.7
437
405.1
373.2
341.3
309.4
277.5
245.6
213.7
181.8
149.9
118
168
139.2
Unit: mm 単位：mm

Dimensions
USB Handheld Controller (OP-87983)

30.7
20.3
47 2 5.45
17.1
11.1
81.5
114.9
φ20

4.6
φ4.5
φ10.55 Unit: mm
Cord length 2.8 m
(Weight: approx. 160 g)
Dedicated Mouse (OP-87506)
57.9
31.2
φ12.4
φ3.3
39.2
1860.0±85 113.7
Unit: mm
(Weight: approx. 100 g)

Dimensions
Cameras (CA-035C/035M/200C/200M/H035C/H035M/H200C/H200M/
H500C/H500M)
With plastic mount attached (factory shipped condition)
15
15
40
10
1/4-20UNC
Depth: max. 5.0
2×M4 2×M3
Depth: max. 5.0 Depth: max. 5.0

18
13.2
23.3
29.5
33.4 (85)
Without plastic mount
8×M3 41
Depth: max. 4.0
41 31
30
31.4
18
30
I7.2
13.5 8×M2.5
37.8 Depth: max. 2.0
12.7
18
13.5
37.8 Unit: mm

Dimensions
Cameras (CA-H048CX/H048MX/HX048C/HX048M)
10.6
17.5
45.0
10.0
4xM4
Depth: max. 5.0
1/4-20UNC

Depth: max. 6.0
23.4
10.6
25.4
34.9 (85.0)

41.0
35.0 41.9 31.0
28.0 5.0
31.4
32.0
35.0
28.0
19.0
7.2
17.0
9.5
4xM3 38.4
Depth: max. 4.0
16xM3
Depth: max. 4
19.0
12.7
17.0
9.5
38.4
Unit: mm

Dimensions
Cameras (CA-H200CX/H200MX/H500CX/H500MX/HX200C/HX200M/
HX500C/HX500M)
12.25
20.15
50.3
10.0
4xM4
Depth: max. 5.0
1/4-20UNC
Depth: max. 6.0
29.0
10.4
30.0
49.6 (85.0) Unit: mm

41.0
40.3
31.0
33.3 55.9
5.0
31.4
I36.0
33.3
40.3
25.0
I7.2
22.0
9.5
4xM3
52.0
Depth: max. 4.0
16xM3
Depth: max. 4.0
25.0
12.7
22.0
9.5
52.0 Unit: mm

Dimensions
Cameras (CA-H2100C/H2100M, XG-H2100C/H2100M)

22.5
22.5
55
10
4xM4
Depth: max. 5

1/4-20UNC
Depth: max. 6
33.4
12.5
26.5
44.2 (85)

45 50 41
33 5 31
31.4
33
24
45
33
φ40
φ7.2
11.5
4xM3
Depth: max. 4 46.5
16xM3
Depth: max. 4
12.7
33
24
11.5
46.5 Unit: mm

Dimensions
Cameras (CA-HF2100C/M)
25
23
60
10
4xM4
Depth: max.5
1/4-20UNC
Depth: max.5
33.4
17.5
31.5
(80)
49.2 Unit: mm

50
40
40
50
33
24
4xM3 16xM3
Depth: max.4 Depth: max.4
11.5
55.9
60.0
33
24
11.5
55.9
Unit: mm

Dimensions
Cameras (CA-HF6400C/M)
25
23
60
10
4xM4
Depth: max.5

1/4-20UNC
Depth: max.5
33.4
17.5
31.5
49.2 (80)
Unit: mm
50
40
40
50
33
24
4xM3
16xM3 11.5
Depth: max.4 55.9
Depth: max.4
60.0
33
24
11.5
55.9 Unit: mm

Dimensions
Head (CA-HS035CH/HS035MH)

46.8
12 35
17.5
11.25
5
6
29.5
2xM3
Depth: max. 4.0
12.7
22.3 (46)

46.8
12 35
12.5
6.25
CMOS distance to lens

In air 4.0 mm
4×M1.6 54.5
Depth: max. 1.2
12.5
Special mount
M10.5 P=0.5 I6.0
Unit: mm
Cord length 2 m
Amplifier (CA-HS035CU/CA-HS035MU)
41 (202)
105
31 98 3.5
3.5
31.4
I7.2 19
Controller side Camera side
26
(76) (86)
11 6
11.5
21
12.7 Unit: mm

Dimensions
11.5
10.3
28.5
2xM3
Depth: max. 4.0

11.5
25
(85)
41
31
23 30
31.4
23.5
11.5
I7.2
CMOS distance to lens
In air 6.0 mm
Special mount 4xM1.6

M15.5 P=0.5 Depth: max. 1.2
12.7
16
18
8.7
25.7 Unit: mm

Dimensions
20
8.9
40
10
1/4-20UNC
2-M4 Depth: max. 5.0
Depth: max. 5.0 2-M3
Depth: max. 5.0
18
13.2
23.3
29.5
33.4 (85)

48.3 42
30 7.5 33
8-M3
Depth: max. 4.0
29.7
30 28 18
6.1
10.6
13.5
3-M2.5
Depth: max. 2.0
11.5
24
13.5
21.5 Unit: mm

Dimensions
20
8.9
40
10
1/4-20UNC
2-M4
Depth: max. 5.0
Depth: max. 5.0
2-M3

Depth: max. 5.0
18
13.2
23.3
29.5
33.4 (85)

60 42
30 7.43 8-M3 33
Depth: max. 4.0
29.7
30 φ28 18
φ6.1
10.6
13.5
3-M2.5
Depth: max. 2.0
11.5
23
13.5
44.5 Unit: mm

Dimensions
Cameras (XG-H035C/H035M/H200C/H200M/H500C/H500M)
20
8.9
40
10
1/4-20UNC
2-M4
Depth: max. 5
Depth: max. 5
2-M3
Depth: max. 5
18
13.2
23.3
29.5
33.4 (85)

60 41
30 7.43 8-M3 31
Depth: max. 4.0
31.4
30 φ28 18
φ7.2
10.6
13.5
3-M2.5
Depth: max. 2.0
12.7
23
13.5
44.5
Unit: mm

Dimensions
Cameras (XG-S035C/S035M/S200C/S200M)
Camera XG-S035CH /XG-S035MH With plastic mount
46.8 46.8
12 12
35 35
12.5 17.5
11.25
CCD distance to lens 6.25 5 5.5

In air 4.0 mm 29.1
2-M3
Special mount (M10.5 P0.5) 54 Depth: max. 4
12.6
6.0
12.5
Cord length 2 m
22.1 (46)

Camera XG-S200CH /XG-S200MH With plastic mount
42.7 42.7
17
30.7 17 30.7
17.5 22.5
CCD distance to lens 9 7.5

5 14
In air 6.0 mm 25.3
2-M3
Special mount (M15.5 P0.5) Depth: max. 4
54
12.6
7.0
11.6
Cord length 2 m
21.2 (47)
Camera control unit With cable connected

XG-S200CU/S200MU/S035CU/S035MU Controller side Camera side
33 (202)
112.6
105
98 3.5 29.7
2-3.6 thru-hole
19 26 6.1
(76) (86)
3.5 2-3.6 thru-hole
6 11 6
21
11.5 11.5
Unit: mm

Dimensions
Camera Cables (CA-CH** Series)

Reference
Standard type (CA-CH**)

φ7.2 Controller side
Camera side
Model Cable length (A)
CA-CH3 3m
φ12.5 31.4
CA-CH5 5m
31 CA-CH10 10 m
43 A 41
Unit: mm
High flex robotic type (CA-CH**R)

Controller side
Camera side φ7.6
31.4
φ12.5
CA-CH3R 3m
φ14
CA-CH5R 5m
CA-CH10R 10 m
31
54 A 41 CA-CH17R 17 m
Unit: mm
L-shaped connector type (CA-CH**L)

Camera side Controller side
φ7.2
31.4
CA-CH3L 3m
30
CA-CH5L 5m
CA-CH10L 10 m
φ14 31
38 A 41
Unit: mm
Direction to attach the L-shaped connector

The direction to attach the L-shaped
connector is shown in the figure below.
The attachment direction cannot be changed.
NOTICE
Make sure to extend the

cable downwards

Dimensions
High flex robotic extension type (CA-CH3BE)

54 A 55
(18) 36 36 (19) CA-CH3BE 3m
15
7.4
13
14
Unit: mm
Environment Resistant type (CA-CH**P)
I7.6
Camera side Controller side Model Cable length (A)
CA-CH3P 3m
I16.5
32
I14

CA-CH10P 10 m
18 31
55 A 41
Unit: mm
High flex robotic and environment resistant type (CA-CH**BP)
Camera side Ø7.4 Controller side

CA-CH5BP 5m
31.4
15
CA-CH10BP 10 m
19 36 31.7
55 A 42
Unit: mm
High flex robotic and environment resistant extension type (CA-CH5BPE)
Camera side ø7.4 Controller side

CA-CH5BPE 5m
14
15
19 36 36 19
55 A 55
Unit: mm

Dimensions
Camera Cables (CA-CF** Series)
Reference
Standard type
ø6.8
CA-CF3 3m
ø14
ø14
CA-CF5 5m
ø14
ø14
39.8 39.8
58.2 A 58.2 CA-CF10 10 m
Unit: mm
L-shaped connector type

ø6.8
CA-CF3L 3m
ø14
31.7
CA-CF5L 5m
ø14
ø14
39.8 39.8
CA-CF10L 10 m
55.2 A 58.2
Unit: mm

The attachment direction cannot be
changed.
NOTICE
Make sure to extend

the cable downwards
Extension type
ø6.8
Camera cable side Controller side
CA-CF5E 5m
ø14
ø14
CA-CF10E 10 m
ø14
ø14
39.8 39.8
58.2 A 58.2
Unit: mm

Dimensions
Camera Cables (CA-CN** Series)

Reference
Standard type (CA-CN**)
6.1 Controller side

Camera side Model Cable length (A)
CA-CN1 1m
12.5 29.7
CA-CN3 3m
CA-CN5 5m
33
43 A 42 CA-CN10 10 m
CA-CN17 17 m

Unit: mm
High flex robotic type (CA-CN**R)
Camera side φ6.6 Controller side

CA-CN3R 3m
φ14φ12.5 29.7
CA-CN5R 5m
33 CA-CN10R 10 m
54 A 42 CA-CN17R 17 m
Unit: mm
L-shaped connector type (CA-CN**L)

6.1 Controller side
Camera side Model Cable length (A)
CA-CN3L 3m
29.7
CA-CN5L 5m
30
CA-CN10L 10 m
CA-CN17L 17 m
14
33
38 A 42
Unit: mm

NOTICE

cable downwards

Dimensions
Extension Cable (CA-CN7RE)

φ6.6
Camera side Controller side Model Cable length (A)
CA-CN7RE 7 m extension
φ14 φ12.5 φ12.5 φ14
54 A 55
Unit: mm
High flex robotic extension type (CA-CN3BE)

54 A 55
(18) 36 36 (19) CA-CN3BE 3m
15
7.4
13
14
Unit: mm

Dimensions
Camera Cable Extension Repeater (CA-CHX10U)/

Camera Cable for the Repeater (CA-CH** Series)
CA-CHX10U CA-CH3X/CH10X
112.6 ø7.2
105
98 ø12.5 ø12.5
3.5 Camera side Controller side

3.5 26 43 A 43
19
2xf3.6
thru-hole CA-CH3RX/CH5RX/CH10RX
ø7.6
21
6 11 6 11.5 ø14 ø12.5 ø12.5 ø14
Camera side 53.9 A 53.9 Controller side

CA-CHX10U (with cable connected)
(213)
Controller side Camera CA-CH3BEX
side

ø7.4
8.7
8.7
14
14
(85) (85) 18 36
54 A
CA-CH3BX/CH5BX/CH10BX
ø7.4 Controller side
Camera side
14
14
19 36 36 19
55 A 55
Unit: mm

CA-CH3X 3m
CA-CH10X 10 m
CA-CH3RX 3m
CA-CH5RX 5m
CA-CH10RX 10 m
CA-CH3BEX 3m
CA-CH3BX 3m
CA-CH5BX 5m
CA-CH10BX 10 m

Dimensions
Camera Cable Extension Repeater (CA-CNX10U)/

Camera Cable for the Repeater (CA-CN** Series)
CA-CNX10U CA-CN3X/CN10X/CN17X
112.6 6.1
105
98 12.5 12.5
3.5 Camera side Controller side

3.5 26 43 A 43
19
2x3.6
thru-hole CA-CN3RX/CN10RX/CN17RX
6.6
21
6 11 6 11.5 14 12.5 12.5 14

53.9 A 53.9
CA-CNX10U (with cable connected)
(213)
Controller side Camera CA-CN3LX/CN10LX/CN17LX
side 6.1
31.2
(85) (85)
14
38 A 43
Unit: mm

The direction to attach the L-shaped CA-CN3X 3m
CA-CN10X 10 m
CA-CN17X 17 m
CA-CN3RX 3m
CA-CN10RX 10 m
CA-CN17RX 17 m
CA-CN3LX 3m
NOTICE CA-CN10LX 10 m
CA-CN17LX 17 m

cable downwards

Options
Options
List of Options
C-mount camera options
Model Description Reference page

CV-L3 Standard lens (focal distance 3 mm) Page 6-96

CA-LH4 High-resolution lens (focal distance 4 mm) Page 6-99
CA-LH8G Vibration-resistant Lens with High Resolution and Low Distortion (focal distance 8 mm) Page 6-102
CA-LH5P IP64-compliant, Environment Resistant Lens with High Resolution and Low Distortion Page 6-104
(focal distance 5 mm)
CA-LHR5 Ultra high-resolution lens (focal distance 5 mm) Page 6-107
CA-LHE12 4/3"-compatible high-resolution C mount lens (Focal distance 12 mm) Page 6-112
CA-LHW8 1-inch lens (C-mount; focal distance: 8 mm) Page 6-110
OP-51612 Close-up Ring Page 6-113
OP-87895 Side view mirror Page 6-131

Options

OP-51603 Polarizing Filter M25.5P0.5 Page 6-114
OP-54029 Polarizing Filter M27P0.5 Page 6-114
OP-54030 Polarizing Filter M30.5P0.5 Page 6-114
CA-LF25 Protective Filter M25.5P0.5 Page 6-114
CA-LF25R Sharp Cut Filter (R60) M25.5P0.5 Page 6-114
CA-LF25Y Blue Cut Filter M25.5P0.5 Page 6-114
CA-LF27 Protective Filter M27P0.5 Page 6-114
CA-LF27R Sharp Cut Filter (R60) M27P0.5 Page 6-114
CA-LF27Y Blue Cut Filter M27P0.5 Page 6-114
CA-LF30 Protective Filter M30.5P0.5 Page 6-114
CA-LF30Y Blue Cut Filter M30.5P0.5 Page 6-114
CA-LMH05 High resolution telecentric macro lens with the optical magnification x 0.5 (straight) Page 6-118
CA-LMHA05 High resolution telecentric macro lens with the optical magnification x 0.5 (coaxial) Page 6-119
CA-LM1 Telecentric macro lens with 1x optical magnification (standard magnification) Page 6-121
(straight)
CA-LM2 Telecentric macro lens with 2x optical magnification (standard magnification)
(straight)
(straight)
(straight)
(straight)
CA-LMA1 Telecentric macro lens with 1x optical magnification (standard magnification)
CA-LM0307 Telecentric macro zoom lens (straight) with 0.3x to 0.075x optical magnification Page 6-122
(standard magnification)
OP-87524 CA-LM0307 dedicated mounting stand
CA-LM0510 Telecentric macro zoom lens (straight) with 0.5x to 1.0x optical magnification Page 6-123
CA-LMHE0510 4/3" compatible, optical magnification ×0.5 to ×1.0 variable magnification Page 6-124
telecentric macro lens (straight)
CA-LMHE20 4/3" compatible, optical magnification ×2.0 variable magnification Page 6-125
CA-LMHR04 Optical magnification ×0.35 to ×0.44 ultra high-resolution Page 6-126
CA-LM0210 1-inch lens (C-mount), macro zoom lens (straight) with 0.2x to 1.0x optical Page 6-129
magnification (standard magnification)
OP-87337 Dedicated stand for securing a macro zoom lens Page 6-129

Options
64 megapixel camera (CA-HF6400C/HF6400M) options

CA-LHL16 2-inch lens (M40 P0.75; focal distance: 16 mm) Page 6-115
CA-LHT18 2-inch high-resolution lens (M40 P0.75; focal distance: 18 mm) Page 6-116
CA-LHT25 2-inch high-resolution lens (M40 P0.75; focal distance: 25 mm)
CA-LHT35 2-inch high-resolution lens (M40 P0.75; focal distance: 35 mm)
CA-LML0210 2-inch lens (M40 P0.75), macro zoom lens (straight) with 0.2x to 1.0x optical Page 6-129
magnification (standard magnification)
OP-87337 Dedicated stand for securing a macro zoom lens
OP-87319 F-mount conversion adapter Page 6-117

OP-88578 C-mount adapter Page 6-117
High-speed, Small Camera (CA-HS200C/HS200M), Small Camera (XG-S200C/S200M) Options

CA-LHS8 High-resolution lens (focal distance 8 mm) Page 6-132
CA-LHS16 High-resolution lens (focal distance 16 mm)
OP-66830 Extension tube (5 mm)
OP-66832 Polarizing filter
OP-66833 Side view attachment
High-speed, Small Camera (CA-HS035C/HS035M), Ultra Small Camera (XG-S035C/S035M) Options

CA-LS4 Standard lens (focal distance 4 mm) Page 6-133
CA-LS6 Standard lens (focal distance 6 mm)
OP-51502 Polarizing filter
OP-51503 Side view attachment

Options
LED Light

CA-DRR3 LED light (direct ring light, red) Page 2-12, 6-134
CA-DRW3 LED light (direct ring light, white)
CA-DRB3 LED light (direct ring light, blue)
CA-DRR5 LED light (direct ring light, red)

CA-DRR4F LED light (direct ring light, red)
CA-DRW4F LED light (direct ring light, white)
CA-DRB4F LED light (direct ring light, blue)
CA-DRR10F LED light (direct ring light, red)
CA-DRW10F LED light (direct ring light, white)
CA-DRB10F LED light (direct ring light, blue)
CA-DLR7 LED light (low angle light, red) Page 2-13, 6-134
CA-DLR10 LED light (low angle light, red)
CA-DLR12 LED light (low angle light, red)
CA-DBR5 LED light (bar light, red) Page 2-12, 6-135
CA-DBW5 LED light (bar light, white)
CA-DBB5 LED light (bar light, blue)
CA-DBR8 LED light (bar light, red)
CA-DBR13 LED light (bar light, red)
CA-DBW12W LED light (bar light, white)
CA-DBW24W LED light (bar light, white)
CA-DBW34H LED light (bar light, white)
CA-DBW50H LED light (bar light, white)
CA-DDR8 LED light (dome light, red) Page 2-13, 6-139
CA-DDW8 LED light (dome light, white)
CA-DDB8 LED light (dome light, blue)
CA-DDR15 LED light (dome light, red)
CA-DDW15 LED light (dome light, white)
CA-DDB15 LED light (dome light, blue)

Options

CA-DSR2 LED light (back light, red) Page 2-12, 6-139
CA-DSW2 LED light (back light, white)
CA-DSB2 LED light (back light, blue)
CA-DSR3 LED light (back light, red)

CA-DXR3 LED light (coaxial light, red) Page 2-13, 6-140
CA-DXW3 LED light (coaxial light, white)
CA-DXB3 LED light (coaxial light, blue)
CA-DXR5 LED light (coaxial light, red)
CA-DXR7 LED light (coaxial light, red)
CA-DQW10 LED light (square bar light, white) Page 2-13, 6-140
CA-DQB10 LED light (square bar light, blue)
CA-DQW15 LED light (square bar light, white)
CA-DQB15 LED light (square bar light, blue)
CA-DRR8M LED light (round multi-angle light, red) Page 2-12, 2-13, 6-140
CA-DRW8M LED light (round multi-angle light, white)
CA-DRB8M LED light (round multi-angle light, blue)
CA-DRR13M LED light (round multi-angle light, red)
CA-DRW13M LED light (round multi-angle light, white)
CA-DRB13M LED light (round multi-angle light, blue)
CA-DQW7M LED light (square multi-angle light, white) Page 2-12, 2-13, 6-141
CA-DQW10M LED light (square multi-angle light, white)
CA-DQW12M LED light (square multi-angle light, white)
CA-DPR2 LED light (spot, red) Page 2-13, 6-141
CA-DPW2 LED light (spot, white)
CA-DPB2 LED light (spot, blue)
CA-DPU2 Special power adapter for spot lights
CA-DP3R Spot light cable (3 m)
CA-DP5R Spot light cable (5 m)
CA-DZW15D White LED Diffuse Line Light (150 mm) Page 6-142
CA-DZW30D White LED Diffuse Line Light (300 mm)
CA-DZW45D White LED Diffuse Line Light (450 mm)
CA-DRW5X White ring diffuse illumination 92-50 Page 6-147
CA-DRW10X White ring diffuse illumination 142-100
CA-DRW20X White ring diffuse illumination 260-200
CA-DRM5X MultiSpectrum light (φ50 mm) Page 6-152
CA-DRM10X MultiSpectrum light (φ100 mm)
CA-DRM20X MultiSpectrum light (φ200 mm)

Options

CA-DRM5DA Dome attachment for MultiSpectrum light (φ50 mm) Page 6-154
CA-DRM10DA Dome attachment for MultiSpectrum light (φ100 mm)
CA-DRM20DA Dome attachment for MultiSpectrum light (φ200 mm)
CA-DRM5PA Polarization filter attachment for MultiSpectrum light (φ50 mm) Page 6-156
CA-DRM10PA Polarization filter attachment for MultiSpectrum light (φ100 mm)
CA-DRM20PA Polarization filter attachment for MultiSpectrum light (φ200 mm)
CA-DXW10X White Coaxial Vertical Light Page 6-151
CA-DRW13P Environment Resistant Ring Light 130 Page 6-144
CA-DBW15P Environment Resistant Bar Light 150
CA-DQP12X Pattern Projection Light 125 mm Page 6-158
CA-DQP25X Pattern Projection Light 250 mm
CA-DQW40X LumiTrax lights 400 mm Page 6-150

Options
Cables

CA-CN1 Camera cable (CA-CN** Series) (1 m) Page 6-55, 6-83
CA-CN3 Camera cable (CA-CN** Series) (3 m)
CA-CN3R High flex robotic camera cable (CA-CN** Series) (3 m)
CA-CN3L L-shape connector camera cable (CA-CN** Series) (3 m)

CA-CN7RE High flex robotic camera extension cable (CA-CN** Series) (7 m)
CA-CN3BE High flex robotic camera extension cable (CA-CN** Series) (3 m)
CA-CH3 Camera cable (CA-CH** Series) (3 m) Page 6-54, 6-80
CA-CH5 Camera cable (CA-CH** Series) (5 m)
CA-CH10 Camera cable (CA-CH** Series) (10 m)
CA-CH3R High flex robotic camera cable (CA-CH** Series) (3 m)
CA-CH3L L-shape connector camera cable (CA-CH** Series) (3 m)
CA-CH3BE High flex robotic extension cable (CA-CH** Series) (3 m)
CA-CH3P Environment resistant camera cable (CA-CH** Series) (3 m)
CA-CH10P Environment resistant camera cable (CA-CH** Series) (10 m)
CA-CH5BP Environment resistant and high flex robotic camera cable (CA-CH** Series) (5 m)
CA-CH10BP Environment resistant and high flex robotic camera cable (CA-CH** Series) (10 m)
CA-CH5BPE Environment resistant and high flex robotic camera extension cable (CA-CH**
Series) (5 m)
CA-CF3 Camera cable (CA-CF** Series) (3 m) Page 6-54, 6-82
CA-CF5 Camera cable (CA-CF** Series) (5 m)
CA-CF10 Camera cable (CA-CF** Series) (10 m)
CA-CF3L L-shape connector camera cable (CA-CF** Series) (3 m)
CA-CF5E Camera extension cable (CA-CF** Series) (5 m)
CA-CF10E Camera extension cable (CA-CF** Series) (10 m)
CA-CNX10U Camera cable extension repeater (CA-CN** Series) Page 2-9, 6-56, 6-86
CA-CHX10U Camera cable extension repeater (CA-CH** Series) Page 2-9, 6-56, 6-85
CA-CN3X Repeater camera cable (CA-CN** Series) (3 m) Page 6-57, 6-86
CA-CN10X Repeater camera cable (CA-CN** Series) (10 m)
CA-CN17X Repeater camera cable (CA-CN** Series) (17 m)
CA-CN3RX Repeater high flex robotic camera cable (CA-CN** Series) (3 m)
CA-CN3LX Repeater L-shape camera cable (CA-CN** Series) (3 m)

Options

CA-CH3X Repeater camera cable (CA-CH** Series) (3 m) Page 6-57, 6-85
CA-CH10X Repeater camera cable (CA-CH** Series) (10 m)
CA-CH3RX Repeater high flex robotic camera cable (CA-CH** Series) (3 m)
CA-CH3BEX Repeater high flex robotic camera cable (CA-CH** Series) (3 m)
CA-CH3BX Repeater high flex robotic camera cable (CA-CH** Series) (3 m)
CA-D2 LED light cable (2 m) Page 6-143
CA-D5 LED light cable (5 m)
CA-D3R High flex robotic LED light cable (3 m)

CA-D1W Y-split LED light cable (0.5 m)
OP-84457 Bare wire LED light cable (1 m)
CA-D3X LED light cable (3 m) Page 6-149
CA-D5X LED light cable (5 m)
CA-D10X LED light cable (10 m)
CA-D5XR High flex robotic LED light cable (5 m)
CA-D02XE LED light extension cable (0.2 m)
CA-D3MX LED light cable (3 m) Page 6-161
CA-D5MX LED light cable (5 m)
CA-D10MX LED light cable (10 m)
CA-D5MXE LED light extension cable (5 m)
CA-D10MXE LED light extension cable (10 m)
CA-D3P Environment resistant LED light cable (3 m) Page 6-146
CA-D5PE Environment resistant LED light extension cable (5 m) Page 6-146
CA-D10PE Environment resistant LED light extension cable (10 m)
OP-26487 Serial connection cable (2.5 m, straight) Page 5-2
OP-26486 D-sub 9-pin connector (female)
OP-84384 D-sub 9-pin connector (male, for SYSMAC)
OP-86930 D-sub 9-pin connector (male, for MELSEC)
OP-66843 Ethernet cable (3 m, cross cable)
OP-51657 Parallel port ribbon cable (3 m) Page 5-16
OP-66844 USB 2.0 cable (2 m) Page 5-2
OP-66842 Monitor cable (3 m) Page 2-10
OP-87055 Monitor cable (10 m)
OP-79426 Ver.1.10 compatible CC-Link cable (20 m) Page 5-7
OP-79427 Ver.1.10 compatible CC-Link cable (100 m)
OP-87264 Touch panel modular RS-232C cable (3 m)
OP-87265 Touch panel modular RS-232C cable (10 m)
OP-88356 Power cable (2 m) Page 6-161
OP-88357 Power cable (5 m)
OP-88358 Power cable (10 m)

Options
Softwares

XG-H1X XG-X Series Integrated Vision Editing Software
CA-H1DB Database Software for the Image Processing System
CA-AD1 Function Addition Add-on SD Card
Others

CA-U4 Ultracompact switching power supply (6.5 A) Page 6-162
CA-U5 Ultracompact switching power supply (12.5 A) Page 6-163
OP-87133 SD card (512 MB) Page 7-4

CA-SD1G SD card (1 GB)
OP-87983 USB Handheld Controller Page 6-67, 7-2
OP-87506 Dedicated Mouse Page 6-67
OP-84364 Ferrite core for the CA-NCL10E/20E Page 5
CA-MP82 LCD monitor Page 6-165
CA-MP120 LCD monitor Page 6-166
CA-MP120T Touch panel LCD monitor
OP-87262 12-inch LCD monitor stand
OP-87263 Touch panel scratch-prevention sticker
OP-88378 Plastic camera mount*1
OP-66852 Plastic camera mount*2
CA-DWC30 Light wavelength conversion sheet (297×210 mm)
OP-87896 C-mount lens adapter for spot lights Page 6-143
CA-F100 Fan unit Page 1-11
CA-S2040 XY Stage for Camera Page 6-168
OP-88379 Calibration plate (125 mm) Page 6-160
OP-88380 Calibration plate (250 mm) Page 6-160
*1 CA-035C/035M/200C/200M/H035C/H035M/H200C/H200M/H500C/H500M dedicated
*2 XG-035C/035M/200C/200M/H035C/H035M/H200C/H200M/H500C/H500M dedicated

Options
Standard Lenses
3.5-mm lens (CV-L3)

* Locking screw on focus ring
M1.7 2 3 * Aperture locking screw
146˚
80˚
1 : 1.6
φ45 1inch
43 32UN
P0.75 φ32
3.5mm
37.5 17.526 Unit: mm
6-mm lens (CV-L6)

A B
37 17.526
4 1.4 engraving
Index line position
1 : 1.4
1inch
φ32.8 32UN
φ32 φ29.4
30.5 φ32
6mm
37˚ P0.5
90˚
A-A B-B
12.8
19
Locking screw on focus ring Aperture locking screw
Unit: mm
A B
16-mm lens (CV-L16)

24.5 17.526
4.4
4
φ30 φ30
A B
1.6 engraving
Index line position
1 : 1.6
φ29.3 φ16
27P0.5 1inch
16mm
32UN
37˚
90˚
7.5
A-A 12.1 B-B
A B
Unit: mm

Options
25-mm lens (CV-L25)

28.5 17.576
4 4.05
φ30
φ28.5 φ15.5
1inch
M27 32UN
P0.5
18.25
3.8
21 Unit: mm

35-mm lens (CV-L35)
36.5 17.576
4 3
M30.5 1inch
φ32 φ21.6 32UN
P=0.5
19.5
5.8
22.5
Unit: mm
50-mm lens (CV-L50)

A B

12.4
5.5
3-M1.7
1.8 engraving
position
120˚ 95˚
1 : 1.8
φ32
30.5 1inch
P0.5 32UN
50mm
120˚ 105˚
3-M1.7
Index line 4
A-A B-B
37 17.526
Unit: mm
A B

Options
Specifications
CV-L3 CV-L6 CV-L16 CV-L25 CV-L35 CV-L50

Focal Distance 3.5 mm 6 mm 16 mm 25 mm 35 mm 50 mm
Aperture F1.6 to F1.4 to F1.6 to F1.6 to F16 F1.6 to F16 F1.8 to
CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE
Minimum working distance 0.1 m 0.2 m 0.4 m 0.2 m 0.3 m 1.0 m
Mount C-mount
Filter thread diameter 43.0 mm 30.5 mm 27.0 mm 27.0 mm 30.5 mm 30.5 mm
P0.75 P0.5 P0.5 P0.5 P0.5 P0.5
Maximum CCD size 1/2 inch 2/3 inch
TV distortion* -10.0% -1.8% -0.8% -0.6% -0.2% -0.2%
(-5.0%) (-1.4%) (-0.2%) (-0.1%) (-0.08%) (-0.1%)
Operating temperature/humidity 0 to +50°C, 80% RH or less (no condensation)
range
Weight Approx. 90 g Approx. 70 g Approx. 44 g Approx. 58 g Approx. 85 g Approx. 50 g
* The indicated values are for a 2/3-inch CCD. The values for 1/3 inch are indicated in parenthesis ( ).

Options
High-resolution Lenses
4-mm lens (CA-LH4)

57.2 17.526
4 5.1
M43 1inch
φ45 P=0.75 φ15.5
32UN
25
7.6

29.6 Unit: mm
8-mm lens (CA-LH8)

(*) 41.6 17.526
(*) 26.8 8.55 (Max)
18.3
20
φ34 φ28.5 M27 P0.5 φ21 1inch

32UN
* Varies based on focal distance. 0 mm (infinite apofocus) to 1.2 mm (minimum apofocus)

Unit: mm
12-mm lens (CA-LH12)

37 17.526
25 4 2.2
16.5
20.25
φ34
φ28.5 1inch
M27 φ22 32UN
P=0.5
Unit: mm

(*) 36.5 17.526
21.8 4.4 (Max)
11
20
1inch
φ33.5 φ27 M25.5 P0.5 φ22.5 32UN
* Varies based on focal distance. 36.5 mm (infinite apofocus) to 38.6 mm (minimum apofocus) Unit: mm

Options

(*) 39.5 17.526
23.6 7.3 (Max)
11
20
1inch
φ33.5 φ28.5 M27 P0.5 φ22.5 32UN

36.5 17.526
28.6 3.5
16
21
φ34
φ29 1inch
M27 32UN
P=0.5
Unit: mm

(*) 55 17.526
41.5 3.5
29
20
φ34 φ28.5 1inch

M27 P0.5 32UN

51 17.526
4 3
M34 φ21.5
φ36 P=0.5 φ32
1inch
32UN
19.5
5.8
22.5 Unit: mm

Options
Specifications
CA-LH4 CA-LH8 CA-LH12 CA-LH16 CA-LH25 CA-LH35 CA-LH50 CA-LH75

Focal Distance 4 mm 8 mm 12 mm 16 mm 25 mm 35 mm 50 mm 75 mm
Aperture F1.6 to F16 F1.4 to F16 F1.4 to F16 F1.4 to F16 F1.4 to F16 F2.0 to F16 F2.8 to F22 F2.5 to F22
Minimum working 0.1 m 0.1 m 0.15 m 0.2 m 0.2 m 0.2 m 0.2 m 1.2 m
distance
Mount C-mount
Filter thread diameter 43.0 mm 27.0 mm 27.0 mm 25.5 mm 27.0 mm 27.0 mm 27.0 mm 34.0 mm
P0.75 P0.5 P0.5 P0.5 P0.5 P0.5 P0.5 P0.5
Maximum CCD size 1/1.8 inch 2/3 inch
TV distortion* -0.2% -0.6% -0.07% -0.05% -0.04% -0.2% -0.03% -0.1%
(-0.13%) (-0.28%) (-0.04%) (-0.1%) (-0.02%) (-0.05%) (-0.01%) (-0.05%)
Operating temperature/ 0 to +50°C, 80% RH or less (no condensation)

humidity range
Weight Approx. 150 g Approx. 83 g Approx. 75 g Approx. 81 g Approx. 89 g Approx. 89 g Approx. 92 g Approx. 105 g
* The indicated values are for a 2/3-inch CCD. The values for 1/3 inch are indicated in parenthesis ( ).

Options
Vibration-resistant Lens with High Resolution and Low Distortion
CA-LH8G
Lock ring
41.6*1 8.5(Performance assurance range*2)
M27(P=0.5)
φ30.0
φ33.0
φ21.0
1-32 UNF
*1 This varies depending on the focal distance. 17.526 C-mount Unit: mm
Extension amount: 0 to 0.6 mm.
*2 Maximum physical value 9.5 mm
CA-LH12G
Lock ring
M27(P=0.5)
φ22.0
φ33.0
φ30.0
1-32 UNF
CA-LH16G
Lock ring
M27(P=0.5)
φ22.5
φ33.0
φ30.0
1-32 UNF
CA-LH25G
Lock ring
M27(P=0.5)
φ30.0
φ22.5
φ33.0
1-32 UNF

Options
CA-LH35G
Lock ring
38.8* 4.0
M27(P=0.5)
φ33.0
φ30.5
1-32 UNF
17.526 C-mount
*This varies depending on the focal distance.
Extension amount: 0 to 6.5 mm. Unit: mm
CA-LH50G

Lock ring
56.2* 4.0
M27(P=0.5)
φ33.0
φ30.0
1-32 UNF
*This varies depending on the focal distance. 17.526 C-mount
Extension amount: 0 to 15.8 mm. Unit: mm
Specifications
CA-LH8G CA-LH12G CA-LH16G CA-LH25G CA-LH35G CA-LH50G

Focal distance 8 mm 12 mm 16 mm 25 mm 35 mm 50 mm
F-stop range (aperture)*1 F1.4/4/8/16 F1.4/4/8/16 F1.4/4/8/16 F1.4/4/8/16 F2.0/4/8/16 F2.8/4/8/16
Minimum WD*2 0.1 m 0.15 m 0.2 m 0.2 m 0.2 m 0.2 m
Mount C-mount
Filter thread diameter 27.0 mm P0.5
Maximum supported 2/3-inch
image size
TV distortion*3 -0.6% -0.07% -0.05% -0.04% -0.2% -0.03%
(-0.28%) (-0.04%) (-0.1%) (-0.02%) (-0.05%) (-0.01%)
Resolving power 100 lines/mm at center, 80 lines/mm on periphery
Operating temperature and 0 to +50°C, 80% RH or less (no condensation)
humidity ranges
Weight Approx. 78 g Approx. 65 g Approx. 66 g Approx. 73 g Approx. 62 g Approx. 76 g
*1 The f-stop (aperture) is changed by replacing the diaphragm plate. When this product is shipped, the OPEN diaphragm plate is
attached to the lens, so replace this with one of the other included diaphragm plates (F4, F8, or F16) as necessary.
To use the f-stop (aperture) in the OPEN mode, use the lens without removing the OPEN diaphragm plate.
*2 If the instrument is installed in a position where the working distance is much closer than the minimum that is listed in the
specifications table, this increases the likelihood that the instrument will fall due to vibrations. When performing this type of
installation, please implement extra fall prevention countermeasures.
*3 The indicated values are for a 2/3-inch CCD. The values for 1/3 inch are indicated in parenthesis ( ).

Options
IP64-compliant, Environment Resistant Lens with High Resolution and

Low Distortion
CA-LH5P
38.3* 7.5 (Max.)
M40.5(P=0.5)
I15.5
I43
I33
1-32 UNF
C-mount
Focus lock ring
(Red) 17.526
* This varies depending on the focal distance.
CA-LH8P
41.6* 8.5 (Max.)

M27(P=0.5)
I30
I21
I33
1-32 UNF
C-mount
Focus lock ring
(Red) 17.526
CA-LH12P
36.5* 6.175 (Max.)

M27 (P=0.5)
I30
I22
I33
1-32 UNF
C-mount
Focus lock ring
(Red) 17.526


Options
CA-LH16P
36.5* 4.9 (Max.)
M27 (P=0.5)
I22.5
I30
I33
1-32 UNF
C-mount
Focus lock ring
(Red)
17.526

CA-LH25P
M27 (P=0.5)
39.7* 7.3 (Max.)
I22.5
I33
I33
1-32 UNF
Focus lock ring C-mount
(Red)
17.526
CA-LH35P
38.8* 4
M27 (P=0.5)
I33
I33
1-32 UNF
C-mount
Focus lock ring
(Red) 17.526
CA-LH50P
56.2* 4
M27 (P=0.5)
f33
f30
f32
1-32 UNF
Focus lock ring C-mount
(Red) 17.526

Options
Specifications
CA-LH5P CA-LH8P CA-LH12P CA-LH16P CA-LH25P CA-LH35P CA-LH50P

Focal distance 5 mm 8 mm 12 mm 16 mm 25 mm 35 mm 50 mm
F-stop range (aperture)*1 F2.8/4/8/16 F1.4/4/8/16 F2.0/4/8/16 F2.8/4/8/16
Minimum WD*2 0.1 m 0.15 m 0.2 m
Filter thread diameter 40.5 mm P0.5 27.0 mm P0.5
Mount C-mount
Maximum supported 2/3-inch
image size
Resolving power 100 lines/mm at center, 80 lines/mm on periphery
TV distortion*3 0.5% -0.6% -0.07% -0.05% -0.04% -0.2% -0.03%
（-0.1%）（-0.28%）（-0.04%）（-0.1%）（-0.02%）（-0.05%）（-0.01%）
Protection structure*4 IP64 (objective lens, water repellent coating specifications)
Operating temperature 0 to +50°C, 80% RH or less (no condensation)

and humidity ranges
Weight Approx. 75 g Approx. 85 g Approx. 75 g Approx. 75 g Approx. 75 g Approx. 65 g Approx. 85 g
*1 The f-stop (aperture) is changed by replacing the diaphragm plate. When this product is shipped, the OPEN diaphragm plate is
attached to the lens, so replace this with one of the other included diaphragm plates (F4, F8, or F16) as necessary. To use the f-stop
(aperture) in the OPEN mode, use the lens without removing the OPEN diaphragm plate.
*2 If the instrument is installed in a position where the working distance is much closer than the minimum that is listed in the
specifications table, this increases the likelihood that the instrument will fall due to vibrations. When performing this type of
installation, please implement extra fall prevention countermeasures.
*3 This indicates the value with the maximum supported image size. The value with the 1/3" image size is shown in parentheses.
*4 When connected to a KEYENCE environment resistant camera (excluding when the close-up ring and filter are attached)

Options
Ultra High-resolution Lenses
5-mm lens (CA-LHR5)

(*) 57.1 17.526
7.6
φ48 M46 φ19 1inch φ33

P=0.75 32UN
20
13

29
* Varies based on focal distance. 0 mm (infinite apofocus) to 2.3 mm (minimum apofocus) Unit: mm
8-mm lens (CA-LHR8)

56 17.526
5.7
φ36 M34 φ22.5 1inch φ33

P=0.5 32UN
20.5
23
37 Unit: mm
12-mm lens (CA-LHR12)

(*) 52.5 17.526
φ33 φ27 M25.5 φ22.8 1inch

P=0.5 32UN
20
18
(*)41.5
* Varies based on focal distance. 0 mm (infinite apofocus) to 1 mm (minimum apofocus) Unit: mm

(*) 47.5 17.526
3.5
φ33 φ27 M25.5 1inch

P=0.5 32UN
20
(*) 19.5
(*) 36.5

Options
(*) 45.5 17.526
3.5
φ33 φ27 M25.5 1inch

P=0.5 32UN
20
(*) 20
(*) 36
(*) 49 17.526
5.3
φ42.5 φ36 M34 φ22.5 1inch φ43

P=0.5 32UN
25.5
(*) 21.8
(*) 38

77 17.526
φ38 φ33 M30.5 φ19 1inch

P=0.5 32UN
23
38
53.5
Unit: mm

Options
Specifications
CA-LHR5 CA-LHR8 CA-LHR12 CA-LHR16 CA-LHR25 CA-LHR35 CA-LHR50

Focal Distance 5 mm 8.5 mm 12 mm 16 mm 25 mm 35 mm 50 mm
Aperture F1.8 to F16 F1.8 to F16 F1.8 to F11 F1.8 to F16 F1.8 to F16 F2.0 to F16 F2.8 to F16
Minimum working 0.1 m
distance
Mount C-mount
Filter thread diameter 46.0 mm 34.0 mm 25.5 mm 25.5 mm 25.5 mm 34.0 mm 30.5 mm
P0.75 P0.5 P0.5 P0.5 P0.5 P0.5 P0.5
Maximum image 2/3 inch
size
TV distortion* -0.33% -0.31% -0.12% -0.20% -0.09% -0.05% -0.02%
(-0.11%) (-0.02%) (0.01%) (-0.11%) (-0.04%) (-0.01%) (0.02%)

Resolving power Center 200 lines/mm, periphery 140 lines/mm
Lens coating WIDE BAND MULTI COATING
humidity range
Weight Approx. 120 g Approx. 115 g Approx. 105 g Approx. 90 g Approx. 95 g Approx. 160 g Approx. 170 g
* The indicated values are for the applicable size CCD. The values for 1/3 inch are indicated in parenthesis ( ).

Options
1-inch Lens
8-mm lens (CA-LHW8)
17.526
Max. 1.25 58
6.9
ø57 ø22.9 ø42
1-32UNF
C-mount
Unit: mm
12-mm lens (CA-LHW12)
Max. 1.25 51.5 17.526

5.3
ø43
ø22.9 ø42
ø38
25.1
1-32UNF
C-mount
Unit: mm
Max. 1.25 52.9 17.526

5.4 4
ø43
ø42
ø38
25.1
1-32UNF
C-mount
Unit: mm
Max. 5.42 43 17.526

4.5
ø43 ø42
ø38
25.1
1-32UNF
C-mount
Unit: mm
Max. 5.42 43 17.526

4
ø43
ø42
ø38
25.1
1-32UNF
C-mount
Unit: mm

Options
Max. 6.4 48 17.526

4
ø49
ø47.5
ø44
28
1-32UNF
C-mount
Unit: mm
Specifications
CA-LHW8 CA-LHW12 CA-LHW16 CA-LHW25 CA-LHW35 CA-LHW50

Focal Distance 8 mm 12 mm 16 mm 25 mm 35 mm 50 mm

Aperture*1 F1.4 to F16 F1.4 to F16 F1.4 to F16 F1.4 to F16 F1.4 to F16 F1.4 to F16
Minimum working 0.1 m 0.3 m 0.3 m 0.3 m 0.3 m 0.5 m
distance
Mount C-mount
Filter thread diameter 55.0 mm P0.75 35.5 mm P0.5 35.5 mm P0.5 35.5 mm P0.5 35.5 mm P0.5 40.5 mm P0.5
Maximum image size 1-inch (ø16.0 mm)
TV distortion*2 -1.2% -1.58% -1.0% -1.0% -0.5% -0.05%
(-1.6%-1%) (-1%-0.6%) (-0.7%-0.4%) (-0.5%-0.3%) (-0.3%-0.1%) (-0.05%-0.02%)
humidity range
Weight Approx. 210 g Approx. 160 g Approx. 150 g Approx. 130g Approx. 140 g Approx. 210 g
*1 To improve the resolution at the edge of the image area, the aperture should be approximately F2.8 during use with a line scan
camera.
*2 The indicated values are for the applicable size CCD. The values for 2/3 inch and 1/2 inch are indicated in parenthesis ( ).

Options
4/3"-compatible Ultra High-resolution C Mount Lens
12-mm lens (CA-LHE12)

1.9 max. 83.1 17.526
6
M55 P = 0.75
φ41
φ57
φ43
φ45
27 1-32UNF
57.5 C-Mount
Unit: mm

79.5 17.526
5.9
M40.5 P = 0.5
φ45
φ41
φ43
26
27
57.5 1-32UNF
C-Mount
Unit: mm

89 17.526
4
M40.5 P = 0.5
φ41
φ45
φ43
26
32
1-32UNF
62.4 C-Mount
Unit: mm

74 17.526
4
M37.5 P = 0.5
φ45
φ43
26.5
1-32UNF
20.5 C-Mount
34
Unit: mm

Options

78 17.526
4
M37.5 P = 0.5
φ43
φ45
φ47
26.5
20.5
1-32UNF
34
C-Mount
Unit: mm
Specifications

CA-LHE12 CA-LHE16 CA-LHE25 CA-LHE35 CA-LHE50
Focal Distance 12 mm 16 mm 25 mm 35 mm 50 mm
Aperture F2.0 to F22 F2.0 to F22 F2.0 to F16 F2.0 to F16 F2.0 to F22
Minimum working distance 0.1 m 0.1 m 0.15 m 0.2 m 0.3 m
Mount C-mount
Filter thread diameter 55 mm P0.75 40.5 mm P0.5 40.5 mm P0.5 37.5 mm P0.5 37.5 mm P0.5
Maximum CCD size 4/3-inch (ø23.0 mm)
TV distortion 0.59% 0.02% -0.57% -0.17% 0.80%
Lens coating WIDE BAND MULTI COATING
Operating temperature/humidity 0 to +50°C, 80% RH or less (no condensation)
range
Weight Approx. 270 g Approx. 250 g Approx. 260 g Approx. 210 g Approx. 220 g
Extension Tube (OP-51612)
0.5 1 5 4 10 4 22 4
1 inch 1 inch 1 inch

32UN 32UN 32UN
Unit: mm
Point This close-up ring is designed for C-mount lenses.

Options
Various Lens Filters
Point If the lens filters are attached to the wide-angle lens, it may result in vignetting.
Polarizing Filter Protective Filter/Sharp Cut Filter (R60)/

Blue Cut Filter
OP-51603 (M25.5 P0.5)
3.5
CA-LF25 (Protective Filter) (M25.5 P0.5)
5.0 CA-LF25R (Sharp Cut Filter (R60)) (M25.5 P0.5)
CA-LF25Y(Blue Cut Filter) (M25.5 P0.5)
M25.5(P=0.5)
M25.5(P=0.5)
φ30.5
φ27.0
(P=0.5)
(P=0.5)
M25.5
M25.5
φ27.5
2.0
12.0
1.9
6.4
OP-54029 (M27 P0.5)
3.5
CA-LF27 (Protective Filter) (M27 P0.5)
5.0
CA-LF27R (Sharp Cut Filter (R60)) (M27 P0.5)

CA-LF27Y (Blue Cut Filter) (M27 P0.5)
M27(P=0.5)
M27(P=0.5)
φ32.0
φ27.0
(P=0.5)
(P=0.5)
M27.0
M27.0
φ29.0
2.0
12.0
1.9
OP-54030 (M30.5 P0.5) 6.4
3.5
5.0
CA-LF30 (Protective Filter) (M30.5 P0.5)

CA-LF30Y (Blue Cut Filter) (M30.5 P0.5)
M30.5(P=0.5)
M30.5(P=0.5)
φ33.5
φ32.0
(P=0.5)
(P=0.5)
M30.5
M30.5
φ32.0
2.0
12.0
2.0
OP-87893 (M34 P0.5) 7.0
3.5
5.0
M34.0(P=0.5)
M34.0(P=0.5)
(P=0.5)
(P=0.5)
φ35.5
φ39.0
M34.0
M34.0
φ36.0
2.0 1.8
12.0
7.0
OP-87894 (M43 P0.75)

3.5
5.0
(P=0.75)
(P=0.75)
M43.0
M43.0
φ45.0
M43.0(P=0.75)
M43.0(P=0.75)
φ45.0
φ48.0
2.0
2.0 7.0
12.0
Unit: mm
Unit: mm

Options
2-inch Lens
16-mm lens (CA-LHL16; for 8K line scan cameras)
M77
P=0.75
M40
ø45 ø47 ø50
ø80 P=0.75
34.6 5
(8.5)
85.1
17.526
Unit: mm

M52
P=0.75 M40
ø45 ø46 ø47 ø50
ø54 P=0.75
32.6 5
45.6 (8.2)
90.4
17.526
Unit: mm
M46 M40
ø48 ø45 ø46 ø47
P=0.75 P=0.75
32.6 5
44.6 (8.2)
(82.6)
17.526
Unit: mm
Specifications
Model CA-LHL16 CA-LHL25 CA-LHL35

Focal Distance 16 mm 25 mm 35 mm
*1
Aperture F2.8 to F32 F2.8 to F32 F2.8 to F32
Minimum working distance 0.1 m
Mount Special mount (M40 P0.75)
Filter thread diameter 77 mm P0.75 52 mm P0.75 46 mm P0.75
TV distortion -0.20% -0.06% -0.05%
Operating temperature/
0 to +50°C, 80% RH or less (no condensation)
humidity range
*1 To improve the resolution at the edge of the image area, the aperture should be approximately F2.8 during use with a line scan
camera.

Options
2-inch High-resolution Lens
18-mm Lens
0.55 99.6 17.526
5 M40×0.75
∞ m
16
2
8 11
M77x0.75
ø 51
1
ø 32
f=18mm/F2.8
ø 79
5.6
4
0.5
2.8
25-mm Lens
0.74 101.8 17.526
5 M40×0.75
∞ m
8 11 16
2
M55x0.75
ø 57
ø 51
1
ø 32
f=25mm/F2.8
5.6
4
0.5
29.8
2.8
35-mm Lens
8.9 94.3 17.526

5 M40×0.75
∞ m
8 11 16
2
M52x0.75
ø 54
ø 51
1
ø 32
f=35mm/F2.8
5.6
4
29.8
0.5
2.8
Specifications
Model CA-LHT18 CA-LHT25 CA-LHT35

Focal Distance 18 mm 25 mm 35 mm
Aperture F2.8 to F16 F2.8 to F16 F2.8 to F16
Minimum working distance 0.1 m
Mount Special mount (M40 P0.75)
Filter thread diameter 77 mm P0.75 52 mm P0.75 52 mm P0.75
TV distortion 1.25% 0.59% 0.12%
Operating temperature/humidity range 0 to +50°C, 80% RH or less (no condensation)

Options
F-mount Conversion Adapter (OP-87319)
10 28.974 0.05
ø35
34
M40 ø59
P=0.75
5
Unit: mm
• Use this adapter to attach a commercially available F mount lens to the special mount (M40 P0.75) camera.
Point • There may be a slight gap between the lens and the mount due to its structure. This adapter is easily affected
by vibrations, so install it so they are not conveyed to the lens and camera.

C-mount Adapter (OP-88578)
1-32UNF
C-Mount 5±0.025 4
M45 P=0.75
ø49.8
Unit: mm
• When attaching a C-mount lens to a 64 megapixel camera (CA-CF6400C/CA-CF6400M), replace the lens
Point mount on the camera with this adapter (64 megapixel mode is not supported).
• Store the replaced 64 megapixel camera lens mount in a safe place.

Options
Telecentric Macro Lenses
CA-LMH05/LMH10/LMH20/LMHA05/LMHA10/LMHA20
• If installing this product, make sure to secure it on the specified locations (specified in the outside
dimensions) on the camera and lens. Also ensure that the securing bracket structure guarantees isolation
NOTICE from the equipment.
• For more information on mounting this product, read the instructions provided with this product.
CA-LMH05
Specified fixing locations on the device
Secure at the spot which is specified on the hatching.
127.0 17.526
18.3 61.7 4.0
C-MOUNT
1-32 UNF
φ33.0
φ34.0
φ22.0
Unit: mm
CA-LMH10
120.7 17.526
30.3 71.4 4.0
C-MOUNT
1-32 UNF
φ28.0
φ34.0
φ22.0
Unit: mm
CA-LMH20
123.3 17.526
36.2 15.6 4.0

C-MOUNT
1-32 UNF
φ28.0
φ34.0
φ22.0
Unit: mm

Options
CA-LMHA05
127.0 17.526
18.3 61.7 4.0
C-MOUNT
1-32 UNF
φ33.0
φ34.0
32.5
φ22.0
9.0
7.2
φ8.0
φ14.0
Joint part of light

φ15.9
13.0
46.7 Unit: mm
CA-LMHA10
120.7 17.526
30.3 71.4 4.0
C-MOUNT
1-32 UNF
φ28.0
φ34.0
φ22.0
27.0
9.5
7.5
φ8.0
φ14.0
Joint part of light
φ15.9
13.0
57.7 Unit: mm
CA-LMHA20
123.3 17.526
36.2 15.6 4.0

C-MOUNT
1-32 UNF
φ28.0
φ34.0
φ22.0
33.0
9.0
6.7
φ8.0
φ14.0
Joint part of light
φ15.9
13.0
71.8 Unit: mm

Options
Specifications
All the values in the specifications below are based on the optical design value. Individual differences can
Point occur depending on the assembling accuracy.
CA-LMH05 CA-LMH10 CA-LMH20 CA-LMHA05 CA-LMHA10 CA-LMHA20

Shape Straight Coaxial
Optical magnification (standard x0.5 x1.0 x2.0 x.0.5 x1.0 x2.0
magnification)
Working distance (mm, at 110.2 110.1 110.2 110.2 110.1 110.2
standard magnification)*1)
Compatible image/CCD size 2/3 inch
Field of view 1/3 7.2 x 9.6 3.6 × 4.8 1.8 × 2.4 7.2 × 9.6 3.6 x 4.8 1.8 × 2.4
(mm, at standard inch
magnification)
1/2 9.6 × 12.8 4.8 × 6.4 2.4 × 3.2 9.6 × 12.8 4.8 × 6.4 2.4 × 3.2
inch
2/3 13.2 × 17.6 6.6 × 8.8 3.3 × 4.4 13.2 × 17.6 6.6 × 8.8 3.3×4.4
inch
Effective F value 9.6 11.1 13.5 9.6 11.1 13.5
*2)
Depth of field (mm) 3.1 0.9 0.3 3.1 0.9 0.3
TV distortion (Max) 0.00% 0.01% 0.00% 0.01%
Resolution (μm) *3) 12.9 7.5 4.5 12.9 7.5 4.5
Mount C-mount
humidity range
Weight Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.
100 g 95 g 130 g 110 g 105 g 140 g
*1 The working distance indicates the operation distance when using each lens with the standard magnification.
*2 The depth of field is the simulation value with the minimum circle of confusion of 40 μm.
*3 The resolution indicates a simulation value calculated at 550 nm.

Options
CA-LM1/LMA1/LM2/LMA2/LM4/LMA4/LM6/LM8
CA-LM1 CA-LMA1 CA-LM2~8 CA-LMA2~4

Straight type Coaxial type Straight type Coaxial type
φ30 φ30
C-mount φ29 C-mount φ29
Light guide receptacle

1inch 1inch
32UN 32UN
4 4
3.5 3.5
7 7
B B
φ14
Light guide receptacle
53 A A
L L φ8 φ16
φ8 φ16
95.5 95.5 25
C
7.5
26
0 0
φ16 - 0.1 φ16 - 0.1
W.D. W.D.

Unit: mm
φ24 φ24
CA-LM(A)2 CA-LM(A)4 CA-LM6 CA-LM8

L (length) 63.5 mm 69.3 mm 80.6 mm 95.0 mm
A (adjustment range) 7.0 mm 9.3 mm 7.7 mm 7.6 mm
B (adjustment position) 13.0 mm 15.1 mm 20.5 mm 34.9 mm
C (coaxial position) 30.7 mm 31.8 mm — —
All the values in the specifications below are based on the optical design value. Individual differences can occur
Important
Point depending on the assembling accuracy.
CA-LM1 CA-LM2 CA-LM4 CA-LM6 CA-LM8 CA-LMA1 CA-LMA2 CA-LMA4

Shape Straight Coaxial
Optical magnification x1 x2 x4 x6 x8 x1 x2 x4
Magnification range — Approx. Approx. ±5% relative to — Approx. Approx.
±3% relative the standard magnification ±3% relative ±5% relative
to the to the to the
standard standard standard
magnification magnification magnification
Working distance 66.9 66.9 70.3 64.4 64.5 66.9 66.9 70.3
(mm, at standard magnification)*1)
Compatible image/CCD size 2/3 inch 1/2 inch 1/2 inch 1/2 inch 1/2 inch 2/3 inch 1/2 inch 1/2 inch
Field of view *2) 1/3 3.6 x 4.8 1.8 x 2.4 0.9 x 1.2 0.6 x 0.8 0.45 x 0.6 3.6 x 4.8 1.8 x 2.4 0.9 x 1.2
(mm, at standard inch
magnification)
1/2 4.8 x 6.4 2.4 x 3.2 1.2 x 1.6 0.8 x 1.07 0.6 x 0.8 4.8 x 6.4 2.4 x 3.2 1.2 x 1.6
inch
2/3 6.6 x 8.8 — — — — 6.6 x 8.8 — —
inch
Effective F value 11.5 15.4 26.5 39.3 52.4 11.5 15.4 26.5
*3) *4)
Depth of field (μm) 920 400 172 111 79 920 400 172
TV distortion (Max) 0.02% -0.04% -0.22% -0.10% -0.04% 0.02% -0.04% -0.22%
Resolution (μm) *5) 7.7 5.1 4.5 4.4 4.4 7.7 5.1 4.5
Mount C-mount
humidity range
Weight Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.
66 g 57 g 58 g 64 g 67 g 75 g 62 g 66 g
*1 The working distance indicates the operating distance when each lens is used at standard magnification. Working distance will vary
depending on the magnification adjustment.
*2 Field of view indicates the standard field of view for each CCD size. The field of view can be changed by approximately ±5% by
adjusting the magnification.
*3 The indicated depth of field is a simulation value that assumes 1/2" image/CCD size and a horizontal resolution of 320 TV lines.
(Circle of least confusion is 40 μm in the image)
*4 Depth of field varies depending on the F value.

Options
CA-LM0307
When using the CA-LM0307, make sure to secure the macro lens directly to the equipment with the dedicated
stand for the telecentric macro lens (OP-87524: sold separately) or with a similarly structured mechanism that
NOTICE guarantees isolation from the equipment. If unsecured, an extreme amount of load will be applied in the vicinity
of the camera mount and may cause the equipment to break or the cause the lens to fall out. For details, see
"Precautions on Use", which is included with the CA-LM0307.
3.5 C-Mount
39.8
M37.5x 0.5
30
40
40.6
41.8
48
29.1
50
M2×4.3 M2×6.5 113.2

116.8
131.7 17.526 Unit: mm
With dedicated stand for the telecentric macro lens (OP-87524: Sold separately), and camera (CV-035C/M:
Sold separately) equipped
Location of mounting screws for 68 41.2
the stand main unit (34.5)
70
(131.7) (48.3)
25
60
Lens center
0.2
80 6.7
130.7 Unit: mm
CA-LM0307
Shape Straight
Optical magnification (standard x0.3 to x 0.75
magnification)
Magnification range —
*1)
WD (mm, at standard magnification) 177.8 (×0.3), 97 (×0.75)
Maximum CCD size 2/3 inch
*2) 1/3 inch
Field of view 4.8 x 6.4 to 12 x 16
(mm, at standard magnification) 1/2 inch
6.4 x 8.5 to 16 x 21.3
Effective F value 5 - CLOSE (F value 2.8 - CLOSE)
Depth of field *3) *4) (μm) 14220 (x0.3), 2270 (x0.75)
TV distortion (Max) 0.10% (x0.3), 0.025% (x0.75)
Resolution *5) (μm) 11.2 (x0.3), 4.5 (x0.75)
Mount C-mount
Operating temperature and humidity range 0 to +50°C, 80% RH or less (no condensation)
*1 WD indicates the working distance when each lens is used at standard magnification. Working distance will vary depending on the
magnification adjustment.
*2 Field of view indicates the standard field of view for each CCD size. The field of view can be changed by adjusting the magnification.
*4 The depth of field is for an effective F value of 32. Depth of field varies depending on the F value.
Options
CA-LM0510
Magnification ring Aperture ring 3.5

C-mount
C · 16 · 8 · 4 2.8
0.5x 0.75x 1.0x
M30.5 ¤ 0.5
φ40
φ33
φ32
φ40.8
φ30
φ42
24.35
2-M2 ¤ 4.3 Locking screw 43
90.5
93.7
103.7 17.526 Unit: mm
Important

CA-LM0510
Shape Straight
Optical magnification (standard x0.5 to x1
magnification)
Magnification range
WD *1) (mm, at standard magnification) 111 (x0.5), 78 (x1.0)
*2)
Field of view 1/3 inch 3.6 x 4.8 to 7.2 x 9.6
(mm, at standard magnification) 1/2 inch 4.8 x 6.4 to 9.6 x 12.8
2/3 inch 6.6 x 8.8 to 13.2 x 17.6
Effective F value 5 - CLOSE (F value 2.8 - CLOSE)
Depth of field *3) *4) (μm) 5120 (x0.5), 1280 (x1.0)
TV distortion (Max) -0.4% (x0.5), -0.1% (x1.0)
Resolution *5) (μm) 3.8 (x0.5), 3.4 (x1.0)
Mount C-mount
*4 The CA-LM0510 depth of field is for an effective F value of 32. Depth of field varies depending on the F value.

Options
4/3" Compatible Variable Magnification Telecentric Macro Lens
CA-LMHE0510
Secure at the spots specified on the hatchings.
119.6* 17.526
10.0 93.5 4.0
13.5 5.5
φ39.5
φ42.0
φ80.0
φ82.0
φ80.0
φ79.0
φ64.0
47.0
24.5 1-32 UNF
C-mount
49.5
* This varies depending on the focal magnification. Extension amount: 0 to 31.9 mm

(the extension amount is at its maximum value when the magnification is at its minimum value). Unit: mm
• If installing this product, make sure to secure it on the 2 designated locations (specified in the outside
Specifications
CA-LMHE0510
Shape Straight
Optical magnification x0.5 to x1.0
WD *1) (mm, at standard magnification) 80.0(x0.5), 81.8(x1.0)
Maximum CCD size 4/3 inch (φ23.0 mm)
Field of view *2) 4/3 inch 36.8x27.6 to 18.4x13.8
(mm, at standard magnification)
2/3 inch 17.6x13.2 to 8.8x6.6
1/3 inch 9.6x7.2 to 4.8x3.6
Effective F value 5 to 32
Resolving power Center/periphery 120 lines/mm
Depth of field *3) (μm) 5120(x0.5), 1280(x1.0)
TV distortion (Max) 0.1%(x0.5), 0.1%(x1.0)
*4)
Resolution (μm) 6.7(x0.5), 3.4(x1.0)
Mount C-mount
Operating temperature and humidity ranges 0 to +50°C, 80% RH or less (no condensation)
*1 WD indicates the distance from the tip of the lens to the workpiece. Changing the magnification changes this distance.
*3 The depth of field is a theoretical value calculated with an effective f-value of 16 and a circle of least confusion of 40 μm. This varies
depending on the f-value.
*4 The resolution indicates a theoretical value calculated at 550 nm.

Options
4/3" Compatible, Telecentric Macro Lens
CA-LMHE20
Secure at the spots specified on the hatchings.
151.0 17.526
10.0 128.5 4.0
φ63.0
28.8 5.9
φ41.5
φ64.0
φ42.0

34.5
51.5 1-32 UNF
C-mount
Unit: mm
• If installing this product, make sure to secure it on the 2 designated locations (specified in the outside
Specifications
CA-LMHE20
Shape Straight
Optical magnification x2.0
WD *1) (mm) 80.6
CCD size 4/3 inch (φ23.0 mm)
Captured field of view *2) 4/3 inch 9.2×6.9
(mm, at standard magnification)
2/3 inch 4.4×3.3
1/3 inch 2.4×1.8
Effective F value 5.0 to 72
Resolving power Center/periphery: 120 lines/mm
Depth of field *3) (μm) 320
TV distortion (Max) 0.1%
Resolution *4) (μm) 1.7
Mount C-mount
*1 WD indicates the distance from the tip of the lens to the workpiece.
*2 The capture field of view range indicates the standard field of view for each CCD size.

Options
Ultra High-resolution Telecentric Macro Lens

• If installing this product, make sure to secure it on the designated locations (specified in the outside
As the lens extends or retracts when the magnification is changed, set the magnification settings first before
Point fixing the lens.
CA-LMHR04
17.526
121.6*
3.5
121.1
33.6
φ50.0
φ51.5
33.3
5.0
35.6 1-32 UNF

C-MOUNT
(the extension amount is at its maximum value when the magnification is at its maximum value). Unit: mm
CA-LMHR08
100.4* 17.526
3.5
100.1
32.9
φ50.0
φ39.5
31.1
16.8
33.9
1-32 UNF
C-mount

Options
CA-LMHR13
Mount at the spot which is specified on the hatching.
114.0* 17.526
3.5
113.4
44.8
φ50.0
φ42.0
31.1

6.5
31.0 1-32 UNF

C-mount
* This varies depending on the focal magnification. Extension amount: 0 to 10 mm
CA-LMHR20
Mount at the spot which is specified on the hatching.
127.0* 17.526
3.5
126.0
34.3
φ48.0
φ44.0
φ14
30.6
41.5
50.5
1-32 UNF
C-mount
CA-LMHR40
Specified fixing locations on the device
Secure at the spot which is specified on the hatching.
166.5* 17.526
3.5
165.5
31.5
φ46.0
φ39.0
φ57.0
36.3
77.5
89.3
1-32 UNF
C-MOUNT
* This varies depending on the focal magnification. Extension amount: 0 to 13.5 mm
(the extension amount is at its maximum value when the magnification is at its maximum value). Unit: mm

Options
Specifications
CA-LMHR04 CA-LMHR08 CA-LMHR13 CA-LMHR20 CA-LMHR40

Shape Straight
Pixel resolution *1) 10μm/pixel 5μm/pixel 3μm/pixel 2μm/pixel 1μm/pixel
(US 3.5 μm: low magnification to US 4.4 μm:
high magnification)
Optical magnification x0.35 to x0.44 x0.69 to x0.88 x1.15 to x1.47 x1.73 to x2.20 x3.45 to x4.41
*2)(mm)
WD At the time of 112.7 111.0 111.6 114.8 65.9
low magnification
At the time of 112.7 111.0 111.6 109.4 65.9
high magnification

*3)
Captured field of view 2/3 inch 24.0 x 20.2 12.2 x 10.3 7.3 x 6.2 4.8 x 4.1 2.4×2.1
(mm) At the time of
low magnification
2/3 inch 19.1 x 16.1 9.5 x 8.0 5.7 x 4.8 3.8 x 3.2 1.9 x 1.6
At the time of
high magnification
1/1.8 inch 20.1 x 15.1 10.2 x 7.7 6.1 x 4.6 4.1 x 3.1 2.0 x 1.5
At the time of
low magnification
1/1.8 inch 16.0 x 12.0 8.0 x 6.0 4.8 x 3.6 3.2 x 2.4 1.6 x 1.2
At the time of
high magnification
Effective F value At the time of 4.4 to 18 5.6 to 21 5.7 to 35 6.8 to 43 8.6 to 183
low magnification
At the time of 5.5 to 22 7.1 to 27 7.3 to 45 8.7 to 56 11 to 234
high magnification
Resolving power Center/periphery: 120 lines/mm
Depth of field *4) (mm) At the time of 10.449 2.689 0.968 0.428 0.108
low magnification
At the time of 6.612 1.653 0.592 0.264 0.066
high magnification
TV distortion At the time of 0.02% 0.005% 0.011% 0.001% 0.015%
low magnification
At the time of 0.01% -0.001% -0.015% 0.011% -0.002%
high magnification
Resolution *5) (μm) 8.39 5.4 3.3 2.6 1.68
Mount C-mount
Operating temperature and humidity ranges 0 to +50°C, 80% RH or less (no condensation)
Weight Approx. 400 g Approx. 285 g Approx. 330 g Approx. 410 g Approx. 650 g
*1 The pixel resolution is the capture field of view per pixel. This varies depending on the camera used.
US = Unit cell size size of 1 pixel
*2 WD indicates the distance from the tip of the lens to the workpiece. Changing the magnification changes this distance.
*3 The capture field of view range indicates the field of view for each CCD size. The field of view can be changed by adjusting the
magnification.

Options
Large-element-compatible Macro Lens

When using a macro zoom lens, make sure to secure it directly to the equipment with the macro zoom lens
Point fixing stand (OP-87337: sold separately) or with a similarly structured mechanism that guarantees isolation
from the equipment. If unsecured, an extreme amount of load will be applied in the vicinity of the camera mount
and may cause the equipment to break or the lens to fall out.
CA-LM0210
30
20.2
15
10

1-32UNF
ø56 ø52.5 ø51.5 ø48 M46 C-mount
ø30 ø50 ø53.5 ø55
P=0.75
48.4 4
112.9 (7)
(142.4) Unit: mm
17.526
CA-LML0210 (for 64 megapixel camera)
30
20.2
15
10
M40
ø56 ø52.5 ø51.5 ø48 ø45 ø50 ø53.5 ø55
M46 P=0.75
P=0.75
48.4 5
112.9 (8.5)
(142.4) Unit: mm
17.526
When the dedicated stand for securing a macro zoom lens (OP-87337) is attached
58 37.6
(30)
68
4×ø5.5
Spot diameter: ø16
Depth:15
(142.4) (50)
34.8
Lens center
79
25
10
15 20 7.6
62 141.1 Unit: mm
94
Stand unit weight: Approx. 980 g

Options
Specifications
CA-LM0210 CA-LML0210
Optical magnification (standard magnification) x0.25 to x1.0 x0.25 to x1.0
Telecentricity — —
x0.25 238 mm 238 mm
WD *1 x0.50 137 mm 137 mm
(mm, at standard magnification) x0.75 105 mm 105 mm
x1.0 88 mm 88 mm
Compatible image/CCD size 1-inch (ø16.0 mm) 2-inch (ø32.0 mm)
2/3 inch 6.6 × 8.8 mm to 26.4 × 35.2 mm 9.6 × 12.8 mm to 38.4 × 51.2 mm
Field of view *2
14.3 mm
14.3 mm to 57.3 mm 28.7 mm to 114.7 mm
(mm, at standard magnification) line scan camera
1 inch 9.6 × 12.8 mm to 38.4 × 51.2 mm 19.2 × 25.6 mm to 76.8 × 102.4 mm
Effective F value F6 to F64 (F value: F2.8 to F32) F6 to F64 (F value: F2.8 to F32)
x0.25 20480 μm 20480 μm
Depth of field *3 *4 (μm) x0.50 5120 μm 5120 μm
x1.0 1280 μm 1280 μm
x0.25 -0.11% -0.10%
TV distortion (max.) x0.50 0.03% 0.10%
x1.0 0.01% -0.10%
x0.25 16.8 μm 16.8 μm
Resolution *5 (μm) x0.50 8.4 μm 8.4 μm
x1.0 4.2 μm 4.2 μm
Mount C-mount Special mount (M40 P0.75)
Filter thread diameter 46.0 mmP0.75 46.0 mmP0.75
0 to +50°C, 80% RH or less 0 to +50°C, 80% RH or less
Operating temperature range and humidity
(no condensation) (no condensation)
Weight Approx. 640 g Approx. 650 g
(Circle of least confusion is 40 μm in the image.)
*4 The depth of field is for an effective F value of 32. Depth of field varies depending on the F value.

Options
Side View Mirror (OP-87895)

With plastic mount attached Without plastic mount
(factory shipped condition)
34.5 4.8
31.0
(22.1)
22.1 (22.1)
31.0 Internal light path
length = 40.4 mm
(37.7)
31.0
45.0
(17.7)
(17.7)

(25.0)
25.0
7.3
9.5
(2.2)
42.5 22.5
33.5 4.5 12.1
26.0
35.0
20.0
3xM3 depth: 7
4xM3
depth: 5 Effective screw part 2 mm to 7 mm
Unit: mm

Options
High-speed, small camera (CA-HS200C/HS200M) /

Small Camera (XG-S200C/S200M) Options
Lens CA-LHS*
A
B CA-LHS8 CA-LHS16 CA-LHS25 CA-LHS50
C
A 40.4 23.9 24.9 40.4
12.5
17 B 28.6 17.9 18.6 27.1
Special mount
9.5
M15.5 P0.5 C 19.6 8.9 9.6 18.1
female threads
CA-LHS specifications
Model CA-LHS8 CA-LHS16 CA-LHS25 CA-LHS50

Focal distance 8 mm 16 mm 25 mm 50 mm
Aperture F2.0 to F16 (min.) F2.0 to F16 (min.) F2.0 to F16 (min.) F3.8 to F16 (min.)
Focus adjustment Adjusted with the focus ring on the camera head
Mount Special mount (M15.5 P0.5)
Maximum supported image size 1/1.8-inch
TV distortion 0.40% -0.04% -0.04% -0.02%
Resolving power 100 lines/mm at center,
80 lines/mm on periphery
humidity ranges
Weight Approx. 20 g Approx. 10 g Approx. 13 g Approx. 17g
Extension tube OP-66830 (5 mm)/OP-66831 (10 mm) Side view attachment OP-66833
B 24.9 2.6
E OP-66830 OP-66831
A
Special A 5 10
mount B 8 13
27.4
D C C 17 17
Special mount D M15.5 P=0.5 female threads
E M15.5 P=0.5 male threads Target
Weight Approx. 1 g Approx. 2 g 17 Light axis
15
Polarizing filter OP-66832 (Internal light path length = 25.8 mm)
8
17 4.2
3 Lens insertion depth 5 mm 23.3
25 4-M1.6
Lens fixing screws 9.5 31.8
Lens Target
opening 3
3-M1.6 15 30
3.1 Weight: Approx. 6 g
Lens fixing screws
2-M2
Weight: Approx. 35 g
Depth: 8
Unit: mm

Options
High-speed, small camera (CA-HS035C/HS035M) /

Ultra Small Camera (XG-S035C/S035M) Options
Lens CA-LS*
A CA-LS4 CA-LS6 CA-LS16 CA-LS30
B
C A 16.7 21.3 20.4 27
10 B 11.5 15.9 10.2 13.2
12 Special mount
7.2 C 8.5 12.9 7.2 10.2
M10.5 P=0.5
female threads
CA-LS specifications
Model CA-LS4 CA-LS6 CA-LS16 CA-LS30

Focal distance 4 mm 6 mm 16 mm 30 mm
Aperture F2.0 to F16 (min.) F2.0 to F16 (min.) F2.0 to F16 (min.) F3.4 to F16 (min.)
Focus adjustment Adjusted with the focus ring on the camera head
Mount Special mount (M10.5 P0.5)
Maximum supported image size 1/3-inch
TV distortion -6.4% -2.7% -0.6% 0.01%
Resolving power 100 lines/mm at center, 100 lines/mm at center, 100 lines/mm at center, 100 lines/mm at center,
25 lines/mm on periphery 32 lines/mm on periphery 50 lines/mm on periphery 80 lines/mm on periphery
humidity ranges
Weight Approx. 5 g Approx. 5 g Approx. 7 g Approx. 7g
Extension tube OP-51500 (5 mm)/OP-51501 (10 mm) Side view attachment OP-51503
B OP-51500 OP-51501 13.7 2.8
E
A
Special mount A 5 10
B 8 13 14.9
D C C 12 12
Special mount D M10.5 P=0.5 female threads Target
12 Light axis
E M10.5 P=0.5 male threads 9.7
(Internal light path length = 15.3 mm)
Weight Approx. 1 g Approx. 1 g Lens insertion depth
Polarizing filter OP-51502 4.5 mm 14.7
8
12
4.2 3 6.25
21
4-M1.6 3
Lens fixing screws
Lens Target
opening 10
17.5
Weight: Approx. 4 g
3 20 2-M2
3-M1.6
Depth: 5 Weight: Approx. 8 g
Lens fixing screws
Unit: mm

Options
LED Lights
Direct ring lights (CA-DR)

CA-DR*3 CA-DR*5/7/9
LED Current
Model Weight 38 l=500 A 4-M3, depth:6
color consumption
4-M3, depth:5 28 SM connector 2P B SM connector 2P
CA-DRR3 Red Approx. 20 g 1.5 W 15 C
CA-DRW3 White Approx. 20 g 2.9 W 16.5 D
3-M1.6, depth:3 3-M1.6, depth:3 l=500

CA-DRB3 Blue Approx. 20 g 2.9 W
CA-DRR5 Red Approx. 40 g 3.2 W
CA-DRW5 White Approx. 40 g 3.6 W
Dimensions
Model
CA-DRB5 Blue Approx. 40 g 3.6 W A B C D
CA-DR*5 50 40 28 17
CA-DRR7 Red Approx. 60 g 7.2 W CA-DR*7 70 50 39 18

CA-DR*9 90 70 50 20.5
CA-DRB7 Blue Approx. 60 g 7.7 W CA-DR*4F CA-DR*10F
43 100
CA-DRR9 Red Approx. 90 g 8.3 W 4-M3, depth: 28 4-M3, depth:
5 mm
70
5 mm 15 50

20.0 l=500 20.0 l=500
CA-DRB9 Blue Approx. 80 g 7.9 W

3-M1.6, depth: 3-M1.6, depth: Unit: mm
3 mm 3 mm
CA-DRR4F Red Approx. 20 g 1.5 W
CA-DRW4F White Approx. 20 g 2.9 W
CA-DRB4F Blue Approx. 20 g 2.9 W
CA-DRR10F Red Approx. 90 g 8.3 W
CA-DRW10F White Approx. 80 g 7.9 W
CA-DRB10F Blue Approx. 80 g 7.9 W
Low-angle lights (CA-DL)

CA-DLR7/12 CA-DLR10
LED Current 4-M3, depth: 6 mm
Model Weight
color consumption 4-M3, depth: 3 mm 100 SM connector 2P
A l=500 84
CA-DLR7 Red Approx. 40 g 2W
B 68
CA-DLR10 Red Approx. 80 g 7.7 W C l=500
22
CA-DLR12 Red Approx. 85 g 3.3 W 10
SM connector 2P
Dimensions 3-M1.6, depth: 3.5 mm

Model
A B C
CA-DLR7 75 56 46
CA-DLR12 125 110 95 Unit: mm

Options
Bar lights (CA-DB)
LED Current CA-DB*** l=500

Model Weight A
color consumption B 2-M2, depth: 4 mm
CA-DBR5 Red Approx. 35g 1.7 W SM connector 2P

D C
CA-DBW5 White Approx. 40 g 2.9 W
CA-DBB5 Blue Approx. 40 g 2.9 W E
CA-DBR8 Red Approx. 60 g 3.6 W 2-M3, depth: 3 mm F
CA-DBW8 White Approx. 60 g 4.8 W Unit: mm

Dimensions
CA-DBB8 Blue Approx. 60 g 4.8 W Model
A B C D E F
CA-DB*5 60 50 17 15 20 30
CA-DBR13 Red Approx. 80 g 4.2 W CA-DB*8 92 82 17 15 20 50
CA-DB*13 142 132 17 15 20 80
CA-DBW13 White Approx. 90 g 7.3 W
CA-DBB13 Blue Approx. 90 g 7.3 W CA-DBW12W
132.0
CA-DBW12W White Approx. 195g 13.8 W

126.8
120.6
CA-DBW24W White Approx. 345g 27.6 W
CA-DBW34H White Approx. 1050 g 18.4 W×2ch L=500
32.4
36.0
41.0
CA-DBW50H White Approx. 1490 g 19.8 W×2ch
(41.0)
(9.3)
23.2
19.0
36.0
(9
(9.0)
0°
)
21.0 90.0 2xM3

depth: 4
CA-DBW12W (When a diffusion plate or polarization plate is mounted)

132.0
125.8
L=500
30.9
41.0
(41.0)
(9.3)
23.2
36.0
(9
(9.0)
0°
)
21.0 90.0 2xM3 Unit: mm

depth: 4

Options
CA-DBW24W
252.0
246.8
240.6
L=500
32.4
36.0
41.0
(41.0)
23.2
19.0
(9.3)
36.0
(9
0° (9.0)
)
4xM3
21.0 70.0 70.0 70.0 depth: 4
CA-DBW24W (When a diffusion plate or polarization plate is mounted)

252
245.8
L=500
30.9
41.0
(41.0)
23.2
(9.3)
36.0
(9
(9.0)
0°
)
4xM3
21.0 70.0 70.0 70.0 depth: 4 Unit: mm

Options
CA-DBW34H
360.0
347.0
340.0
60.0
62.0
41.0
2xL=500
(62.0)
33.2
29.0
(22.1)
60.0
(16.4)
(9
0°
)

30.0 150.0 150.0 3xM4
depth: 5
CA-DBW34H (When a diffusion plate or polarization plate is mounted)

360.0
345.0
52.3
62.0
2xL=500
(62.0)
33.2
(22.1)
60.0
(16.4)
(9
0°
)
30.0 150.0 150.0 3xM4

depth: 5 Unit: mm

Options
CA-DBW50H
520.0
507.0
500.0
60.0
62.0
41.0
2xL=500
(62.0)
33.2
29.0
(22.1)
60.0
(16.4)
(9
0°
)
35.0 150.0 150.0 150.0 4xM4

depth: 5
CA-DBW50H (When a diffusion plate or polarization plate is mounted)

520.0
505.0
52.3
62.0
2xL=500
(62.0)
33.2
(22.1)
60.0
(16.4)
(9
0°
)
35.0 150.0 150.0 150.0 4xM4 Unit: mm

depth: 5

Options
Dome lights (CA-DD)
LED Current CA-DD*8/15

Model Weight A SM connector
color consumption 2P l=500
4-2.1
CA-DDR8 Red Approx. 70 g 5.8 W
CA-DDW8 White Approx. 70 g 5.8 W
A B C D
E
CA-DDB8 Blue Approx. 70 g 5.8 W
CA-DDR15 Red Approx. 130 g 11 W
F
CA-DDW15 White Approx. 170 g 18.8 W
Dimensions
Model
CA-DDB15 Blue Approx. 170 g 18.8 W A B C D E F
CA-DD*8 26 30 20 87 54 40
CA-DD*15 55 73 50 154.5 114 66
Unit: mm
Back lights (CA-DS)

CA-DSW/B3 CA-DSR3
LED Current 46 46
Model Weight 43 43
color consumption 32
2×φ3.5
32
2×φ3.5
CA-DSR2 Red Approx. 30 g 2.2 W
40
63
62
40
63
62
CA-DSW2 White Approx. 30 g 2.9 W L=500 L=500
CA-DSB2 Blue Approx. 30 g 2.9 W

11.7
8.2
CA-DS*7 CA-DS*9
CA-DSW3 White Approx. 40 g 5.8 W
112
97 106
CA-DSB3 Blue Approx. 40 g 5.8 W 91 92 4 xφ3.5
77 4 xφ3.5
CA-DSR9 Red Approx. 110 g 14 W
93
92
70
78
77
60
CA-DSW7 White Approx. 90 g 18 W L=500 L=500
CA-DSB7 Blue Approx. 90 g 18 W

11.7
8.2
CA-DSW15 White Approx. 320 g 27.4 W CA-DS*15
170
164 4 xφ3.5
CA-DSB15 Blue Approx. 320 g 27.4 W 150
CA-DSW30 White Approx. 1780 g 19.8 W×2ch

151
150
120
L=500
CA-DSR2 CA-DSW/B2
46 46
43 43
2 x φ3.5 2 x φ3.5
32 32
33
32
33
32
15
15
17.2
L=500 L=500
11.7
8.2
CA-DSW30 In the case of installing metal fixture In the case of installing metal fixture
on the long side on the short side
355.8 (300)
(300) (300)
255.8
(200)
(200)
2xL=500 2xL=500 2xL=500

(32)
(32)
(31)
(9
(9
(9
0
0°
0
°)
°)
(60) 180.0 325.6 (60) 180.0

(10) 10.0 260.0 10.0 13.8
10.0
225.6
140.0
160.0
140.0
10.0
16xM3 4x5.2
depth: 3.5 4x5.2
Unit: mm

Options
Coaxial lights (CA-DX)

41 2-M3, depth 3
LED Current
Model Weight
color consumption 30 20 12
CA-DX*3
CA-DXR3 Red Approx. 60 g 1.8 W
6 18
CA-DXW3 White Approx. 60 g 1.9 W 4-M3, 58.5
9 12 depth 3 0.8 Half mirror
0.8 Glass plate
CA-DXB3 Blue Approx. 60 g 1.9 W
10
CA-DXR5 Red Approx. 230 g 5W 10 27
L=500
CA-DXW5 White Approx. 230 g 4.9 W

CA-DXB5 Blue Approx. 230 g 4.9 W 97
80 2-M4, depth 5
CA-DXR7 Red Approx. 380 g 6.7 W
CA-DXW7 White Approx. 380 g 10.1 W 60 36 40
CA-DX*5
CA-DXB7 Blue Approx. 380 g 10.1 W
4-M4,
10 40 depth 5 16 32
2.4 2.4 Half mirror Glass plate L=500
15
32 59
120
82 50
CA-DX*7
4-M4, 50
17
11 60 depth 5
2.4 2.4 Half mirror Glass plate L=500
14 14
50 79 55
1
50 2x2-M4;depth 5
Unit: mm
Square lights (CA-DQ)
LED Current CA-DQ**

Model Weight A
color consumption 8-M2
F G
C Depth: 4 I
4-M3 thru-hole
E
CA-DQW10 White Approx. 370 g 11.5 W D
B
CA-DQB10 Blue Approx. 370 g 11.5 W SM connector 2P
(4 locations)
J H
CA-DQW15 White Approx. 520 g 19.2 W L=500

(4 locations)
CA-DQB15 Blue Approx. 520 g 19.2 W
Model Dimensions
A B C D E F G H I J
CA-DQ*10 109 109 63.4 55 17 27.9 70 70 60 60
CA-DQ*15 150 150 95.4 87 17 27.9 110 110 102 102 Unit: mm
Multi-angle ring lights (CA-DR**M)
CA-DR*8M 90°
4-M3, depth:
26.5
LED Current 5 mm
Model Weight
color consumption φ55
φ36 φ80
L=500
CA-DRR8M Red Approx. 150 g 6.6 W
CA-DRW8M White Approx. 150 g 10.6 W CA-DR*13M 90° 26.5
4-M3, depth:
CA-DRB8M Blue Approx. 150 g 10.6 W 5 mm
7
CA-DRR13M Red Approx. 260 g 12.5 W φ10
φ86 φ130
L=500
CA-DRW13M White Approx. 260 g 19.8 W
CA-DRB13M Blue Approx. 260 g 19.8 W
Unit: mm

Options
Multi-angle square lights (CA-DQW*M)
CA-DQW7M 4-M3, depth:

LED Current 47 5 mm
26.5 26
Model Weight
color consumption
26
70
47
L=500
CA-DQW7M White Approx. 160 g 11.3 W
CA-DQW10M White Approx. 250 g 16.9 W
CA-DQW10M 26.5 100
4-M3, depth: 56
CA-DQW12M White Approx. 310 g 19.9 W 77 5 mm
100
56
77
L=500
CA-DQW12M 4-M3, depth: 26.5 120

97 5 mm 76
120
97
76
L=500

Unit: mm
Spot lights (CA-DP**)
CA-DP*2 37
LED Current 20
Model Weight 12
color consumption*
φ14 0
-0.1 φ8 0
-0.1 φ16
CA-DPR2 Red Approx. 20 g 8.4 W (2.0 W)
CA-DPW2 White Approx. 20 g 8.4 W (2.0 W) L=500 SM connector 3P
CA-DPB2 Blue Approx. 20 g 8.4 W (2.0 W) CA-DPU2

88.9
* Current consumption indicates the total power consumed by both 25 35 21.3

L=500 SM connector 2P
the spot light and the power adapter. Figures in parenthesis ( ) 79.1 2-φ3.6
96.9
indicate the power consumption of the spot light.
CA-DP3R/DP5R
Model Compatible lights Weight
(With spot light cable (3 m/5 m) connected)
CA-DPU2 • CA-DPR2 Approx. 120 g Spot LED light
Illumination side controller side
• CA-DPW2 (60) (25)
• CA-DPB2 13.5 8
CA-DP3R/DP5R
Compatible spot light cables
Extension cable (high flex robotic) 7.4 7.5
CA-DP3R/DP5R
Cable length Model
Unit: mm
3m CA-DP3R
5m CA-DP5R

Options
Diffuse line type (CA-DZ**D)
LED Current
Model Weight
color consumption CA-DZW15D
CA-DZW15D White Approx. 250 g 13.2 W

184
CA-DZW30D White Approx. 420 g 26.4W 25 169
15 150 15
CA-DZW45D White Approx. 620 g 19.8 W×2ch
18
30
18
L=500
17
4xφ4.7 4xφ8
Through-hole
2xM3
80
Depth:4max
CA-DZW30D
334
25 319
15 300 15
18
30
18
L=500
17
4xφ4.7 4xφ8
Through-hole
4xM3 80 80 80
Depth:4max
CA-DZW45D
484
25 469
18
15 450 15
30
18
2xL=500
17
4xφ4.7 4xφ8
Through-hole
6xM3 80 80 80 80 80
Depth:4max
Unit: mm

Options
C-mount Lens Adapter for Spot Lights (OP-87896)
28.5
24.5
φ34.0 21.0
9.0 11.5 3-M3 P=120°
1-32 UNF
φ25.0
φ8.0
31.0
C-mount
4-M3
Unit: mm

LED Light Cable
Standard cable
φ4.6
Model Cable length (A) Weight
12
8
CA-D2 2m 60 g
Heat shrinkable Heat shrinkable
tube A tube
CA-D5 5m 130 g
Unit: mm
High flex robotic cable

φ4.8
12
8
CA-D3R 3m 80 g
Heat shrinkable Heat shrinkable
tube A tube
CA-D5R 5m 140 g
Unit: mm CA-D10R 10 m 270 g
CA-D17R 17 m 450 g
Y-split type
Heat shrinkable
tube Model Cable length (A) Weight
A
CA-D1W 0.5 m 50 g
12
Heat shrinkable
φ4.6 tube
8
A
12
A
Heat shrinkable Unit: mm
tube
Bare wire to connector cable

φ4.6 White: + Black: -
12
OP-84457 1m 30 g
Heat shrinkable
tube A Unit: mm

Options
IP67-compliant, Environment Resistant LED Light
（CA-DRW13P）
Ring type
90°
45°
4 × M3 Depth: 5
I107
I86
I28.5
I141
I15
L=500
Unit: mm
（CA-DBW15P）
Bar type
205
24.6 5 195
22.5 5 185 4.7
4.7 24.1 157.8
20
I15
20
30
34
22.8
L=500 4xI4.6 mounting hole
63 80
2xM3 Depth: 4
Unit: mm

Options
Specifications
CA-DRW13P CA-DBW15P
Shape Ring type Bar type
LED Color White
Compatible illumination cables Environment resistant illumination cable
CA-D3P (3 m)
Environment resistant illumination extension
cable CA-D5PE (5 m)/CA-D10PE (10 m)
Power consumption 19.8 W 13.2 W
Environmental Ambient 0 to 40 ºC
Relative 85% RH or less (no condensation)

humidity
* A KEYENCE-specified environment resistant illumination cable must be mounted on the product.

Options
LED Light Cable (for CA-DRW13P/CA-DBW15P)
For lighting power connection (CA-D3P)
I4.8 9.5
M12
I15
8
43 A 18.5
Unit: mm

CA-D3P 3m 100 g
For extension (CA-D5PE/D10PE)
I4.8
M12
I15
f15
43 A 40
Unit: mm

CA-D5PE 5m 170 g
CA-D10PE 10 m 310 g

Options
LumiTrax Light
CA-DRW5X CA-DRW10X
4-M3 58.0 6.0 35.3 93.0

6.0 35.3
4-M3
35.2
φ50.0
60.2
φ92.0
58.0
φ142.0
φ100.0
93.0

(63.0)
(63.0)
Unit: mm
Unit: mm
CA-DRW20X
174 8 44.3
4xM4
21.3
114.7
7.4
102.8
3.9
R3
R2
φ260
174
φ200
(63)
Unit: mm

Options
Specifications
CA-DRW5X CA-DRW10X CA-DRW20X

Illumination method Ring illumination configuration
LumiTrax Mode/Standerd Lighting Mode
Constant current control (1024 digital levels)
Light adjustment responsiveness Within 1 ms
LED Color White White White
Lamp count 16 lamps 32 lamps 32 lamps
Outside φ92×35 mm φ142×35 mm φ260×45 mm
dimensions (not including connector) (not including connector) (not including connector)
(Internal diameter) φ50 φ100 φ200
Connection with the I/F Six-pole circular connector for LumiTrax LED illuminations (dedicated cable)
controller Cable Dedicated Cable (3 m/5 m/10 m), Dedicated Cable
maximum 20 m (when using relay cables) (3 m/5 m/10 m),

maximum 10 m
(when using relay cables)
Illumination CA-DC50E
expansion unit
Power consumption 34.5 W (during Standerd Lighting 40.5 W (during Standerd Lighting 60.9 W (during Standerd Lighting
Mode) Mode) Mode)
humidity

Options
LED Light Cable (dedicated for CA-DRW5X/DRW10X/DRW20X)
Standard cable CA-D3X/D5X/CA-D10X

φ4.1
φ13.6
φ13.6
A
Unit: mm

CA-D3X 3m 110 g
CA-D5X 5m 170 g

CA-D10X 10 m 320 g
High flex robotic cable CA-D5XR

φ5.0
φ13.6
φ13.6
A
Unit: mm

CA-D5XR 5m 230 g
Relay cable CA-D02XE

φ4.1
φ12.0
φ12.0
A
Unit: mm

CA-D02XE 0.2 m 30 g

Options
LumiTrax Light
CA-DQW40X
(92)
120 (87.7)
4 × M6
Depth: Max. 10 81.8
221.7
175 400 490
78.1
400
445
Unit: mm
490
Specifications
Model CA-DQW40X
Square illumination pattern
Illumination method LumiTrax emission/regular emission
Constant current control (1024 gradation digital)
Light adjustment responsiveness 1 ms or less
Color White
LED
Lamp count 168
Outside dimensions (not including connector) 490 mm x 81.8 mm
Internal diameter 400 mm
I/F 12-pole round connector (dedicated cable)
Connection with the
Cable Dedicated cable (3 m/5 m/10 m), max. 30 m (when using extension cables*1)
controller
Illumination expansion unit CA-DC60E
I/F 3-pole round connector (dedicated cable)
Connection with
Cable Dedicated cable (2 m/5 m/10 m)*2
external power supply
Power voltage 24 V
Power consumption (current consumption) 156 W (7.3 A)
Environmental Operating ambient temperature 0 to +40°C
resistance Operating ambient humidity 85% RH or less (no condensation)
Weight Approx. 3.0 kg
*1 Up to 2 extension cables can be connected to the dedicated cable.

*2 The cable length can be extended to up to 30 m by using an AWG12 cable.

Options
Coaxial Vertical Illumination for LumiTrax Specular Reflection Mode
CA-DXW10X
83 55.1 4×M4
(Depth:8)
125
141
83
8.5
125 17.1
167 0.5

4×M4
Half mirror Glass plate (Depth:8)
6.2
0.5
137.5 (90)
125
125
92
92 50.6
Unit: mm
CA-DXW10X
LED color White
Connection with controller I/F 12-pole round connector (dedicated cable)
Cable Dedicated cable (3 m/5 m/10 m),
max. 30 m (when using extension cables*1)
Illumination expansion unit CA-DC60E
Current consumption 28W
* Up to 2 extension cables can be connected to the dedicated cable.

Options
MultiSpectrum Light
CA-DRM5X
4xM4 (82)
90°
Depth:8max
42
(70.7)
φ100
φ145
φ50
(70.7)
49.8
φ145
φ51
φ60
φ30
50.2
Unit: mm
CA-DRM10X
90° (82)
4xM4
Depth:8max
67
φ140
φ100
φ195
(99)
(99)
50
φ100
φ100
φ195
φ50
69
Unit: mm
CA-DRM20X
45° 8xM4 (82)

Depth:8max
117
φ221.7
φ91.8
φ240
φ200
φ295
φ91.8
φ221.7 60
φ200.9
φ200
φ295
φ100
118.1
Unit: mm

Options
Specifications
CA-DRM5X CA-DRM10X CA-DRM20X

Illumination method Ring illumination configuration (supporting the optional Dome Attachment CA-DRM(DA) Series
and Polorization Filter Attachment CA-DRM(PA) Series*1)
MultiSpectrum Mode/LumiTrax Mode/Standerd Lighting Mode (unicolor omnidirectional
lighting)*2
Constant current control (1024 digital levels: with CA-DC60E connected/adjustable for each
wavelength*3)
Light adjustment responsiveness Within 1 ms
LED Peak wavelength Approx. 405 nm (UV)/approx. 457 nm (B)/approx. 527 nm (G)/approx. 600 nm (O)/
approx. 660 nm (R)/approx. 730 nm (FR)/approx. 860 nm (UR)/approx. 600 nm (W)
Lamp count 8 lamps 16 lamps
Outside φ145×49.8 mm φ195×50 mm φ295×61.8 mm
dimensions

(Internal diameter) φ50 φ100 φ200
(not including
connector)
Connection with the I/F 12-pole round connector (dedicated cable)
controller
expansion unit
Power consumption 51.4 W 71.0 W 71.0 W
(during Standerd Lighting Mode) (during Standerd Lighting Mode) (during Standerd Lighting Mode)
humidity
*1 Wavelengths of approx. 405 nm (UV) and approx. 860 nm (IR) are not supported.
*2 It is possible to make a setting for continuous lighting in Standerd Lighting Mode only when volume limitation on illumination is active.
*3 Simultaneous lighting in multiple colors is not supported.
*4 Up to two extension cables can be connected with the dedicated cable.

Options
Dome Attachment Dedicated for MultiSpectrum Light
CA-DRM5DA
φ145
φ51
φ30
φ60
50.2
(When attached to CA-DRM5X) 82
90° 4xM4
Depth:8max
42
(70.7)
φ100
φ145
φ30
φ60
76.8
(70.7)
Unit: mm
CA-DRM10DA
φ195
φ101
φ100
φ50
(When attached to CA-DRM10X) 69 (82)
90°
4xM4
Depth:8max
67
φ140
φ100
φ195
(99)
φ50
(99)
90
Unit: mm
CA-DRM20DA
φ200.9
φ100
φ200
φ295
(When attached to CA-DRM20X) 45°

118.1
(82)
8xM4
Depth:8max
117
φ100
(221.7)
(91.8)
φ200
φ295
φ240
(91.8) 139
(221.7)
Unit: mm

Options
Specifications
Model CA-DRM5DA CA-DRM10DA CA-DRM20DA

Supported illumination unit CA-DRM5X CA-DRM10X CA-DRM20X
Effective field of view φ50 mm φ100 mm φ200 mm
humidity
Weight (with illumination unit attached) Approx. 120 g Approx. 220 g Approx. 650 g
(Approx. 680 g) (Approx. 820 g) (Approx. 1730 g)

Options
Polarization Filter Attachment Dedicated for MultiSpectrum Light
CA-DRM5PA
φ55.5
φ145
69.8
(When attached to CA-DRM5X)

4×M4
90°
Depth:8max (82)
42
(70.7)
φ100
φ145
70.1
(70.7)
Unit: mm
CA-DRM10PA
φ110.7
φ195
71.1
(When attached to CA-DRM10X) 4×M4

(82)
90° Depth:8max
67
φ195
φ140
(99)
71.6
(99)
Unit: mm
CA-DRM20PA
φ214
φ295
83.7
(When attached to CA-DRM20X) (82)
45°
8×M4
Depth:8max
67
(221.7)
(91.8)
φ193
φ240
φ195
(91.8) 71.6
(221.7)
Unit: mm

Options
Specifications
Model CA-DRM5PA CA-DRM10PA CA-DRM20PA

Supported illumination unit CA-DRM5X CA-DRM10X CA-DRM20X
Effective field of view φ50 mm φ100 mm φ200 mm
Supported lighting color* B/G/AM/R/FR/W
humidity
Weight (with illumination unit attached) Approx. 130 g Approx. 210 g Approx. 470 g
(Approx. 690 g) (Approx. 810 g) (Approx. 1550 g)
* “UV” and “IR” lighting colors cannot be used for Multispectrum Light. See the user manual of the image processing controller used for
more details on how to select the lighting color.

Options
Pattern Projection Light
CA-DQP12X CA-DQP25X
166
115
115.2
309
278
180
4 × M4 Depth:
6 max
6 × M6 Depth:
115 9 max
166 4xø9
115.2
50 150
278
309
55.6
48.8
19.8
93
ø64.7
129.3
72.25
72.8
10.7
(90)
(90)
Unit: mm Unit: mm

Options
Specifications
CA-DQP12X CA-DQP25X
Lighting method Square illumination pattern
Pattern projection lighting / Profile imaging / lighting / LumiTrax lighting / Normal lighting
Constant current control method (1024 gradation digital. When connected to CA-DC60E:
Setting is possible for each light source.)
Response speed 1 ms or less
Patter projection light source
Color White White
Number of LED light 72 168
elements
Repeatability (typ. 0.1 mm or less*1 0.1 mm or less*1
value)

Reference distance 125 mm 250 mm
Recommended 125 mm 250 mm
measurement range
(XY)
Recommended 100 to 150 mm 200 to 300 mm
measurement range
(Z)
LumiTrax light source
Color White White
Number of LED light 36 84
elements
Dimensions (connector excluded) 166 x 48.8 309 x 72.8
Inner Diameter 64.7 115.2
Connection with the I/F 12-pole round connector (dedicated cable)
controller
expansion unit
Connection with external I/F - 3-pole round connector (dedicated cable)
power supply Cable - Dedicated cable (2 m/5 m/10 m)
Power voltage - 24 V
Power consumption (current consumption) 30 W (1.4 A) 79 W (3.7 A)
Environmental resistance Operating ambient 0 to +40°C*3
temperature
Operating ambient 85% RH or less (no condensation)
humidity
Weight Approx. 0.8 kg Approx. 4.2 kg
*1 Varies depending on the camera, lens, installation conditions, and measuring conditions.
*2 Up to 2 extension cables can be connected to the dedicated cable.
*3 Warm-up is necessary when below 10 °C. The necessary time length of warm-up is about 10 minutes for CA-DQP12X and about 20
minutes for CA-DQP25X.

Options
Calibration Plate Dedicated for Pattern Projection Light
OP-88379 OP-88380
150
300
150
(1)
(2)
(3)
300
(1)
(1) Approx. 8 mm (2)
(2) Approx. 18 mm
(3)
(3) Approx. 28 mm
Unit: mm
(1) Approx. 8 mm
(2) Approx. 28 mm
(3) Approx. 48 mm
Unit: mm
Specifications
OP-88379 OP-88380
Applicable light model CA-DQP12X CA-DQP25X
Environmental Ambient operating
0 to +40°C
Ambient operating
85%RH or less (no condensation)
humidity

Options
LED Light Cable (for CA-DRM*X/CA-DXW10X/DQP*X)
Reference Up to two extension cables can be connected, which provides a maximum of 30 m of total cable length.
Standard cable (high flex robotic type) CA-D3MX/D5MX/D10MX
φ7.2
φ15.0
φ15.0
58 A 58

CA-D3MX 3m 310 g
CA-D5MX 5m 490 g
CA-D10MX 10 m 900 g
Unit: mm
Illumination extension cable (high flex robotic type) CA-D5MXE/D10MXE

φ7.2
φ15.0
φ15.0
64 A 58

CA-D5MXE 5m 490 g
CA-D10MXE 10 m 900 g
Unit: mm
Power Cable (for CA-DQP25X/DQW40X)
Power cable OP-88356/88357/88358

21
46.5 A 30 70

OP-88356 2m 300 g
OP-88357 5m 500 g
OP-88358 10 m 800 g
Unit: mm

Options
Ultracompact switching power supply (CA-U4/U5)
Ultracompact switching power supply CA-U4
When front mounted

(12) 120 (Mounting bracket : OP-42174)
43.3
122.5 35.9
170
10
14.3
16.1 85.5 16.5
2.5
59 15
12.5
40 t=2
60 28 59 4-φ5 122
15.5
28
Screw hole for mounting

4-M3 Screw insertion depth 5 max.
When bottom mounted When side mounted

(Mounting bracket : OP-42175) (Mounting bracket : OP-51629)
132.5
157
t=2
12.5 7 15
5
12.5
t=2 12.5 50
60 75 20.5
The side mounting bracket can be attached to either side.

40 55
150
160 4-φ5
Unit: mm

Options
Ultracompact switching power supply CA-U5

(10.0) 131.5
124.0
35.9
P=10
46.5
16.8
2.0
70.5
140.0 96.0 16.5
78.0 21.5
10.0

120.0
Screw hole for mounting
4xM3 Screw insertion depth 5 max.
Unit: mm

Options
Specifications
Model CA-U4 CA-U5

*1
Input Rated Input voltage 85 to 264 VAC, 110 to 370 VDC
conditions
Rated Frequency*1 47 to 63 Hz, DC
Input current (100/200 VAC) 2.2 A/1.1 A max. 3.9 A/1.8 A max.
Efficiency (100/200 VAC) 82%/85% typ. (with 100% load)
Leakage current (100/200 VAC) 0.4 mA/0.75 mA max. (with 100% load)
Rush current (100/200 VAC) 25 A/50 A max. (with 100% load, at +25 ºC cold start)
Output Rated output voltage 24V DC
characteristics Adjustable voltage range ±5% (with V.ADJ)
Rated output current 6.5 A 12.5 A
Ripple/noise voltage 180 mVp-p max.
Input fluctuation 0.4 % max.

Load fluctuation 1.5 % max.
Temperature fluctuation 0.02 %/ºC max.
Starting time 500 ms max.
(at Surrounding Air Temperature of 0 to +55ºC under rated I/O conditions)
Output holding time 20 ms min. (at Surrounding Air Temperature of +25ºC under rated I/O conditions)
Protection Overcurrent protection Constant current reduction. Automatic reset
7.9 A or more 15.6 A or more
Overvoltage protection*2 Activates when the voltage reaches 26.4 V or more. Voltage turn-off.
Operation resumes when the input power is turned on again.
Display Display method 3-digit, 7-segment LED (Character height: 10 mm)
Memory backup time Approx. 10 years (at +20ºC)
Display resolution 0.1 A/0.1 V/1%
Environmental Surrounding Air Temperature –10 to +55ºC, No freezing
resistance (for operation)
Surrounding Air Temperature –20 to +70ºC, No freezing
(for storage)
Withstand voltage 3.0 kVAC 50/60 Hz 1 min (across input and output terminals)
2.0 kVAC 50/60 Hz 1 min (across input terminal and FG terminal)
500 VAC 50/60 Hz 1 min (across output terminal and FG terminal)
Shock resistance Peak acceleration: 300 m/s2, in X, Y, and Z directions, 2 times respectively
Vibration resistance In X, Y, and Z directions, 2 hours respectively under the following conditions
10 to 57 Hz: 0.3 mm double-amplitude, 57 to 500 Hz: 19.6 m/s2 (2G), 5.5-minute
cycle
Insulation resistance 100 M min. (with 500 VDC megohmmeter) (across input and output terminals)
(across input terminal and FG terminal) (across output terminal and FG terminal)
Applicable Safety standard UL : UL508, UL60950-1
standard C-UL : CSA C22.2 No.14-M95, CSA C22.2 No.60950-1-03
EN : EN62368-1, EN50178
IEC : IEC62368-1
EMC standard FCC Part15B ClassA, EN55011 ClassA, EN61000-6-2
Harmonic current emissions EN61000-3-2
regulation
Others Parallel operation Possible (OP-42207 is required.)*3
Serial operation Possible (External diode is required.)*3
Cooling method Natural air-cooling
*1 During the application for safety standard, the rated input voltage is 100 to 240 VAC and the rated frequency is 50/60 Hz.
*2 To reset the unit, turn off the input power once, wait for 1 minute or more, and then turn on the input power again.
*3 The Applicable standards do not apply for parallel and serial operations.

Options
LCD Color Monitor (CA-MP82)
CA-MP82
241.2
(Outline of mounting
bracket) Panel thickness 1.0 to
230 4.0 mm 171 .6
:5
pth
Mounting bracket 77.5 75 de
ve
151 cti
ffe
4E
Mounting screw 4-M
(Outline of
127.8 39
mounting bracket)
180 Effective 106 75
191.2 6
display area 4-ø 24.3 93.5
52.5
76.2 38

31.5
156 6 34 135
* When OP-66842 is connected
170.4
Effective display area
Panel cut dimensions
255
205
+1
169.5 0
+1
219.5 0 Unit: mm
Specifications
CA-MP82
Display panel Display element a-Si TFT Active Matrix
Display color 16,777,216 colors
Number of display dots 1024 (W) × 768 (H) dots
Effective display area 170.4 (W)× 127.8 (H) mm
Backlight Life Average life: approx. 100,000 hours (25°C vertical installation)
I/O Input signal Analog RGB signal (0.7 Vp-p, 75Ω) horizontal, vertical period signal
Input signal mode 1024 (W) × 768 (H), vertical frequency 60 Hz or 800 (W) × 600 (H), vertical frequency 60 Hz
Connector High-density D-sub 15-pin, female (3WAY, inch screw)
Ratings Power supply voltage 24 VDC ± 10%
Current consumption 0.4 A or less
Ambient operating 0 to +40°C
temperature
Structure Panel embedded type, dust-proof, water-drop-proof structure equivalent to IP65f at front only

Options
Touch Panel LCD Monitor (CA-MP120T)/LCD Monitor (CA-MP120)
CA-MP120T
Panel installation diagram

247.4 4-M4
75
(Effective display area) Effective depth: 10
186
6.5 (Effective
75
display area) 35
255
240
φ10
8.1
28
15
6 (49.5) 342
360
55.5

Panel thickness
Mounting bracket
1.6 to 4.0 mm
Mounting screws
263
(Outline of
mounting 242 +1
0
bracket)
157.5 156.5 344 +1 Unit: mm

0
CA-MP120
Panel installation diagram

247.4 4-M4
75
(Effective display area) Effective depth: 10
6.5 186 75
(Effective 35
255
display area) 240
342
15 6 28
360 49.5
55.5

Mounting bracket
Mounting screws
263
(Outline of +1
242 0
mounting
bracket)
157.5 156.5 344 +10 Unit: mm

Options
Specifications
Model CA-MP120T CA-MP120

Liquid crystal panel Display element a-Si TFT Active Matrix
Effective display area 245 (W) x 184 (H) mm
Number of display dots 1024 (W) x 768 (H) dots or 800 (W) x 600 (H) dots
Display color 16,777,216 colors
Backlight Life Average life: approx. 100,000 hours (+25°C vertical installation)
Input/Output Input signal Analog RGB signal (0.7 Vp-p, 75) horizontal, vertical period signal
Input signal mode 1024 (W) x 768 (H), vertical frequency 60 Hz, or 800 (W) x 600 (H), vertical frequency 60 Hz
Input signal connector High-density mini D-sub 15-pin, female (3WAY, inch screw)
Touch panel connector D-sub 9-pin, male (2WAY, inch screw) -
Handheld controller connector RJ45 connector -

Rating Power supply voltage 24 V DC ±10%
Current consumption 1.0 A or less
Ambient temperature 0 to +40°C
Relative humidity 85% RH or less (no condensation)
Structure Panel embedded type, dust-proof, drop-proof structure equivalent to IP65f at front only
Weight Approx. 2.3 kg

Options
XY Stage for Camera
CA-S2040
Camera mounting attachment (A)

37.5 4-M3 Depth: 6 mm max.
2 × ø3.35 mounting hole
(stage surface mounting screw)
45
37.5 37.5 2 × ø2.85 mounting hole
33.25
24.25
Adjustment screw (2.5 mm hexagonal socket)
Locking screw (slotted, width: 0.8, depth: 1.1)

18
37.5
45
Movable range: ±20

8
45
Camera mounting attachment (B)

24
Camera mounting attachment 2 × ø3.35 mounting hole
18
20 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 20 45
37.5
33.25
25.25
20 80 20
23
4-M3 Depth: 8 mm max.

23
37.5
35 45
5 70
45
Movable range: ±10
73
10 5 0 5 10
43 35
10 45 10
Unit: mm

Options
Specifications
Model CA-S2040
Distance moved Short axis ±10 mm
Long axis ±20 mm
Marked scale resolution Display resolution 1 mm (0.1 mm with vernier used)
Thread pitch 0.7 mm/turn (on both short and long axes)
Withstand load 1.5 kgf
Lock function Lock screw appropriate tightening torque: 0.3 Nm
Environmental Ambient operating temperature 0 to +50°C
resistance
Weight 250 g

The applicable camera models and the camera mounting attachments to use are listed below. For details, see the
Reference CA-S2040 Instruction Manual.
• Camera mounting attachment (A)

CA-H035C/M, CA-H200C/M, CA-H500C/M, CA-035C/M, CA-200C/M
• Camera mounting attachment (B)
CV-H035C/M, CV-H200C/M, CVH500C/M, CV-035C/M, CV-200C/M, XG-H035C/M, XG-H200C/M, XG-H500C/M,
XG-035C/M, XG-200C/M

Options
7
Chapter
Appendix
Appendix


Controlling the Handheld Controller (Optional)
This section explains the common operations and functions of the USB handheld controller (OP-87983).
The Function for Each Button
Functions can be assigned to each button and to key combinations. The accessible operations on the handheld controller
Reference can be changed for different user accounts. The operations described here assume the handheld controller is being used
with the default assignments by a user with administrator privileges. The actual operation may differ for your handheld
controller. For more details about assigning functions to the handheld controller, see the XG-X VisionEditor Reference Manual.
(5) (1) No. 0 button/8-way thumbpad

Press the outer cursor button up, down, right or left to
Appendix
(1) (6) move the selected item on the screen.

Press the button in the center to confirm the setting on
the screen.
(2) (7)
(2) No. 1 button (FUNCTION)
(3) (8)
Press the button to toggle the function menu on/off.
(4) (9) It is also setup by default as a combination button.
(3) No. 4 button (SCREEN)
This button cycles the screen through different display
types (raw image 1, filtered, etc.).
(4) No. 5 button (VIEW)
Press to display the View Toolbar for zooming in or out
on the screen, or for switching between options of
such as result display or display patterns.
(5) No. 7 Back button
In Setup mode, this button is used to toggle the display
of the flowchart between normal and magnified.
In Run mode, this button is used to open the number 100
custom menu box. To open the number 100 custom
menu box, you need to create the custom menu box in
advance on the XG-X VisionEditor. For more details, see
the XG-X VisionEditor Reference Manual.
It is also setup by default as a combination button.
(6) No. 8 selector switch (RUN/STOP)
This switch toggles between Run mode and Setup
mode. Flick this switch to toggle between Run mode
and Setup mode.
(7) No. 3 button (TRIGGER)
Press this button to issue a trigger for all cameras.
Press and hold the No. 3 button in the Setup mode to
issue a continuous trigger (only when trigger input is
enabled). Press the No. 3 button (TRIGGER) again to
stop triggering.
(8) No. 6 button (MENU)
Push this button to display the Image Strip to check
archived images or run tests again.
(9) No. 2 button (ESCAPE)
Press this button to return to the previous screen or to
resume the previous operation.

Multiple Key Combinations

Various functions can be performed on the handheld controller using key combinations (pressing two or more buttons
simultaneously). Note, the functions available will differ depending on the controller operating state, and the functions
assigned to the key combinations on the handheld controller.
Operation when the power is on (combination keys: default settings)
Operation Buttons to use

Saving the current image on the screen to SD Card 2 No. 1 button (FUNCTION) + No. 5 button (VIEW)
(Screen capture) Or
No. 7 Back button + No. 5 button (VIEW)
Send a reset signal to the controller No. 1 button (FUNCTION) + No. 2 button (ESCAPE)
Or
No. 7 Back button + No. 2 button (ESCAPE)
Changing screens No. 1 button (FUNCTION) + No. 4 button (SCREEN)
Appendix
Or
No. 7 Back button + No. 4 button (SCREEN)
Change the level of intensity for the dialog menus No. 1 button (FUNCTION) + No. 6 button (MENU)
Or
No. 7 Back button + No. 6 button (MENU)
In addition to the above, there are also key operations which can only be used from the Flow Editor and Screen Editor.
Reference For more details, see the XG-X Series User's Manual.

Inserting and Removing an SD Card
Users can save the program settings or captured images on an SD card.
• The flash memory used as the storage element on the SD card has a read/write lifespan that, when reached, may
result in an eventual loss of data. Data stored on an SD card should be backed up regularly to other media.
NOTICE • SD Card 1 contains the global settings and other data necessary for the controller to operate. Make sure it is
inserted at startup and while the power is ON.
• Data that must be loaded by swapping SD cards should be stored on SD card 2.
Supported SD Card Models

Use the optional Keyence OP-87133 (512 MB), optional CA-SD1G (1 GB), optional CA-SD4G (4 GB) or optional CA-
SD16G (16 GB).
Note that the controller ships with one of the following SD cards inserted in the SD1 slot:
Appendix
• XG-X1000/X1002/X1200/X1202/X2000/X2002/X2200/X2202: OP-87133
• XG-X1500/X1502/X2500/X2502/X2700/X2702/X2800/X2802/X2800LJ: CA-SD1G
• XG-X2900/X2902/X2900LJ: CA-SD4G
• Do not use any SD card other than the models mentioned above. Using those cards may cause data loss or setting
NOTICE data damage.
• For details about file management on SD cards and card formatting, refer to the XG-X Series User's Manual.
Inserting an SD Card
Insert the SD card into the SD1 and SD2 slot such that the triangle inscription is on the top of the card.
SD2 slot
Insert SD card.
SD1 slot
(Do not insert or remove
while power is on.)
• Be sure the card is oriented correctly when inserting it. Inserting the card in the wrong direction may damage
the data and SD card.
• The access drive light illuminates while there is an SD card in the drive.
- Green: An SD card is inserted and accessible.
NOTICE - Red: The SD card is being accessed.
- Not lit: The SD card is not active. (The SD card can be removed from the slot.)
• When inserting the SD card into the SD1 slot, turn off the controller. Keep SD Card 1 inserted at startup and
while the power is ON.

Removing an SD Card 5 Remove the SD card from the SD2 slot on the controller.
Choose [Stop SD2 Operation], then press the SD card in

(1) Make sure the access
the SD2 slot inward to release and remove the card. drive light is not lit.
(2) Open cover.
• Make sure to take the following steps to
protect the SD card and the data it contains.
(3) Press SD card
• If you remove the SD card using a procedure to unlock it.
other than that specified, or if power is turned
off when the card is being accessed, any (4) Remove SD card.
NOTICE writing task will stop resulting in a possible
loss of data or damage to the SD card.
• SD Card 1 should not be removed while the
controller is turned on. Turn off the controller
before removing SD Card 1.
1 On the handheld controller, press the No. 1 (FUNCTION)

button.
Appendix
2 Select [Stop SD2 Operation].
3 Select [OK].
4 When a confirmation screen appears stating that

preparation to eject the card is complete, select [Close] to
close the confirmation screen.
The LED indicator turns off, indicating that SD Card 2
can now be removed.

Connecting and Disconnecting the USB HDD
Users can save the program settings or captured images on a USB HDD.
• The unit’s power GND (0V) is shared in common with the connector shield and signal GND. If there is a potential
difference with the connection for the USB HDD, this may result in breakdowns or malfunctions of the unit and the
NOTICE USB HDD.
• Depending on lifespan, malfunctions, and the like, the saved data on the USB HDD may be lost. Data stored on a
USB HDD should be backed up regularly to other media.
If you think that there are potential difference with the connections, use a USB HDD which supports bus powered drives.
Reference The controller’s bus power feed capacity is 900 mA (USB 3.0 compatible). Check with the USB HDD manufacturer
concerning the bus power drive compatibility of the USB HDD that you are using.
In addition, do not use USB hubs since they may cause the feed capacities and the data transmission speeds to decrease.
Supported USB HDD

Appendix
• External HDDs that support USB 2.0 and USB 3.0 can be connected to the controller's USB HDD connector. However,
not every external HDD that is compatible with this specification is guaranteed to function on the controller.
NOTICE • The maximum capacity that can be recognized as a disk on the controller is 2 TB. Additionally, if there are multiple
partitions on the USB HDD, the controller will recognize only the first partition that it recognized as a disk.
• The power saving function on some USB HDDs may cause the read speed from the controller to decrease. Keyence
recommends that you disable the power saving function in advance.
Point • To connect the USB Cable for VisionDataStorage OP-88263, see the OP-88263 Instruction Manual and the
VisionDataStorage User’s Manual.
Connecting a USB HDD

Insert a USB cable that is compatible with the USB HDD that you are going to connect into the controller's USB HDD
connector (blue terminal).
USB HDD connector
Connect a USB cable.
Use a USB cable that is compatible with the USB HDD that you are going to connect to the controller. Using a cable
NOTICE that is not compatible may cause the controller and the USB HDD to malfunction. Check with the USB HDD
manufacturer concerning the compatible USB cable.
Make sure to format the connected USB HDD with the controller before using it. The controller may not correctly
Important recognize the USB HDD with its factory settings or if it has been formatted by a computer.
For more details about formatting the USB HDD, see the XG-X Series User's Manual.
Only the blue USB HDD connector on the controller can be used to connect a USB HDD. If you connect a USB
Point HDD to the black CONSOLE/MOUSE (USB) connector or the USB connector, it will not function.

Removing a USB HDD

After you perform the procedure to remove the USB HDD,
remove the USB cable and the USB HDD.
• To prevent the corruption of data or damaging

the USB HDD, make sure to always perform the
procedure below.
• If you perform a procedure other than the one
NOTICE specified and remove the USB HDD or turn off
power to the USB HDD while it is being
accessed, files will stop being saved, which
may corrupt data or damage the USB HDD.
1 On the handheld controller, press the No. 1

(FUNCTION) button.
Appendix
2 Select [Stop USB HDD Operation].
3 Select [OK].

preparation to remove the USB HDD is complete, select
[Close] to close the confirmation screen.
The USB HDD can now be removed.

Exporting and Importing Settings
By exporting and importing settings data, you can copy

settings data from another controller, or edit controller 4 Select [Save].
settings data on the XG-X VisionEditor and apply the edited
settings data to the controller. 5 For [Program File], select [All].
• By changing [Folder], you can change

Reference the name of the folder that you want to
Exporting Settings export the settings to.
• You can also export only a specific program
number. For [Program File], select [Individual]
This section will describe how to export settings data to an
and then select the program number that you
SD card. want to export in [Program file].
1 Insert an SD card into the SD2 slot. 6 Select [Execute] to start exporting the settings.
Appendix
Make sure to use an SD card that is

supported by the controller.
NOTICE For more details, see Supported SD Card
Models in "Inserting and Removing an SD
Card" (Page 7-4).

For more details about how to switch modes, see
(Page 4-3).
3 Select the Setting No. Display field and then select [New/
Edit/Del Programs].
exporting of settings is complete, select [Close] to close
the confirmation screen.
8 Select [Stop SD2].
9 Select [OK].
When a confirmation screen appears stating that
preparation to eject the card is complete, select
[Close] to close the confirmation screen, and then
remove the SD card.

Importing Settings 4 Select [Load].
This section will describe how to import settings data from an 5 For [Program File], select [All].
SD card.
6 In [Load from], select the settings data that you want to
1 Insert an SD card into the SD2 slot. import.
Folders that can be imported are displayed as one of
Make sure to use an SD card that is
supported by the controller. the following icons:
NOTICE For more details, see Supported SD Card
Models in "Inserting and Removing an SD (Not selected)
Card" (Page 7-4).
(Selected)
For more details about how to switch modes, see You can also import only a specific program
"Switching between Run Mode and Setup Mode" Reference number. For [Program File], select [Individual]
(Page 4-3). and then select the program number that you
Appendix
want to import in [Load from].
3 Select the Setting No. Display field and then select [New/
7 Select [Execute] to start importing the settings.
Edit/Del Programs].
A confirmation screen appears stating that the settings

have been imported.
8 Select [Restart now] to restart the controller.
If you have not selected the [System Setting]

Reference check box in [File Type], the controller does
not need to be restarted. A confirmation screen
prompting you to restart will not appear.

Saving Camera Images for Simulation
Saving Camera Images for Simulation
This section describes the procedure to save captured

camera images to the SD card1. 5 If necessary, set [File Naming Rule] and [Image Format],
and then select [OK] to close the [Settings] screen.
Camera images saved to the SD1 card can
Point be used for simulations on a computer and
the controller's retest function.

For more details about how to switch modes, see
(Page 4-3).
2 Select the capture unit.

Appendix
6 On the handheld controller, push the No.3 (TRIGGER)

button. A trigger is input and an image is captured.
The camera image that you want to save will be
displayed.
7 Select [Capture Image].
3 Select [Simulation Image Capture].
When a confirmation screen appears stating that

saving of the image is complete, select [Close] to
close the confirmation screen.
8 Select [OK] to close the operation screen.
4 Select [Settings].
9 Turn off the controller and remove the SD card from the
SD1 slot.

INDEX
INDEX
CA-HS035CU ....................................................... 6-74

Numerics
CA-HS035M ......................................6-24, 6-46, 6-74
8-way thumbpad ..................................................... 7-2
CA-HS035MH ....................................................... 6-74
CA-HS035MU ....................................................... 6-74
A CA-HS200C .......................................6-25, 6-46, 6-75
Aperture .................................................................. 4-8 CA-HS200M ......................................6-25, 6-46, 6-75

CA-HX048C .......................................6-14, 6-47, 6-69
CA-HX048M ......................................6-14, 6-47, 6-69
B CA-HX200C .......................................6-26, 6-47, 6-70
Base Installation of the Controller ........................... 2-5 CA-HX200M ......................................6-26, 6-47, 6-70
Brightness ............................................................... 4-7 CA-HX500C .......................................6-27, 6-48, 6-70
CA-HX500M ......................................6-27, 6-48, 6-70
INDEX
Camera ................................................................... 4-6
C CAMERA 1 connector .......................................... 1-11
CA-035C ........................................... 6-10, 6-41, 6-68 CAMERA 2 connector .......................................... 1-11
CA-035M ........................................... 6-10, 6-41, 6-68 Camera Cable ...................................6-54, 6-80, 6-83
CA-200C ........................................... 6-11, 6-42, 6-68 Camera Cable Extension Repeater ...6-56, 6-85, 6-86
CA-200M ........................................... 6-11, 6-42, 6-68 Camera Input Unit ..............2-3, 2-4, 6-2, 6-61, 6-62,
CA-CHX10U ................................................ 6-56, 6-85 6-63, 6-64, 6-65, 6-66
CA-CNX10U ................................................ 6-56, 6-86 CA-MP82 ............................................................ 6-165
CA-DC40E .............................. 5-20, 6-38, 6-61, 6-66 CA-NCL20E ...............................5-6, 6-40, 6-64, 6-66
CA-DC50E ...........5-22, 5-24, 6-38, 6-62, 6-63, 6-66 CA-NEC20E .........................................5-9, 6-40, 6-65
CA-DC60E .................................................. 6-39, 6-66 CA-NEP20E .......................................5-11, 6-41, 6-65
CA-E100 .....6-39, 6-61, 6-62, 6-63, 6-64, 6-65, 6-66 CA-NPN20E .......................................5-13, 6-41, 6-65
CA-E200L .............................................................. 6-40 CA-U4 ................................................................. 6-162
CA-F100 ................................................................ 1-11 CA-U5 ................................................................. 6-163
CA-H035C ......................................... 6-10, 6-42, 6-68 CC-Link Interface ................................................... 5-6
CA-H035M ........................................ 6-10, 6-42, 6-68 CC-Link Unit ........................................5-8, 6-64, 6-66
CA-H048CX ...................................... 6-14, 6-43, 6-69 Circuit ................................................................... 5-26
CA-H048MX ...................................... 6-14, 6-43, 6-69 Close-up Ring ........................................................ 2-8
CA-H200C ......................................... 6-11, 6-43, 6-68 Coaxial Illumination .............................................. 2-13
CA-H200CX ...................................... 6-16, 6-44, 6-70 Communication Expansion Unit ......................2-3, 2-4
CA-H200M ........................................ 6-11, 6-43, 6-68 Communication expansion unit ............................ 6-65
CA-H200MX ...................................... 6-16, 6-44, 6-70 Compatible Cameras by Controller ........................ 6-2
CA-H2100C ....................................... 6-19, 6-45, 6-71 Connecting ......................................................2-9, 7-6
CA-H2100M ...................................... 6-19, 6-45, 6-71 Connecting a USB HDD ......................................... 7-6
CA-H500C ......................................... 6-17, 6-44, 6-68 Connecting Cables .......................................2-9, 2-16
CA-H500CX ...................................... 6-18, 6-45, 6-70 CONSOLE/MOUSE (USB) connector ................... 1-10
CA-H500M ........................................ 6-17, 6-44, 6-68 Controller .............. 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 1-5, 1-6, 1-10, 2-2,
CA-H500MX ...................................... 6-18, 6-45, 6-70 4-2, 6-33, 6-36, 6-58
CA-HF2100C ..................................... 6-20, 6-48, 6-72 Cooling ................................................................... 2-2
CA-HF2100M .................................... 6-20, 6-48, 6-72
CA-HF6400C ..................................... 6-22, 6-49, 6-73
CA-HF6400M .................................... 6-22, 6-49, 6-73 D
CA-HS035C ...................................... 6-24, 6-46, 6-74 DC 24 V power ............................................2-11, 2-16
CA-HS035CH ........................................................ 6-74 Dedicated Mouse ................................................. 6-67
XG-X SM(Area)-GB I-1

INDEX
Dimensions ........................................................... 6-58 LumiTrax ................................................1-5, 1-6, 2-17

DIN Rail ................................................................... 2-5 LumiTrax illumination ............................................ 2-13
Dome Illumination ................................................. 2-13
M
E Macro lens .............................................................. 2-8
Error LED .............................................................. 1-10 Main Specifications .............................................. 6-33
Error message .............................................. 4-9, 4-10 MENU button .......................................................... 7-2
Error Output ............................................................ 3-5 MONITOR (RGB output) terminal ......................... 1-10
ESCAPE button ....................................................... 7-2 Multiple Key Combinations .................................... 7-3
EtherCAT Interface ................................................. 5-9
EtherCAT Unit ....................................................... 5-10
ETHERNET connector ........................................... 1-11
N
Ethernet Interface ................................................... 5-3 No.0 button ............................................................. 7-2
EtherNet/IP Interface ............................................. 5-11 No.1 button ............................................................. 7-2
EtherNet/IP Unit .................................................... 5-12 No.2 button ............................................................. 7-2
Example of connections ................... 5-26, 5-27, 5-28 No.3 button ............................................................. 7-2
INDEX
Expansion Unit ...................................................... 5-20 No.4 button ............................................................. 7-2
Expansion unit connector ..................................... 1-11 No.5 button ............................................................. 7-2
Exporting Settings ................................................... 7-8 No.6 button ............................................................. 7-2

No.7 Back button ................................................... 7-2
No.8 selector switch ............................................... 7-2
F
Fan unit ................................................................. 1-11
Focus ...................................................................... 4-7
O
FOV Chart ............................................................... 2-7 Oblique illumination .............................................. 2-12
FUNCTION button ................................................... 7-2 OP-87506 ............................................2-10, 4-2, 6-67

OP-87983 ............................................2-10, 4-2, 6-67
Options ................................................................. 6-87
H OUT/IN connector (Terminal block) ..................... 1-11
Handheld Controller ................................................ 7-2 Output circuit diagram ......................................... 5-27
Output Signal ......................................................... 4-5
Output Time ............................................................ 3-8
I
I/O (parallel I/O) connector ................................... 1-10
I/O Interface ............................................................ 5-1 P
Illumination .................................................... 2-12, 4-6 Parallel I/O Interface ............................................. 5-16
Illumination Expansion Unit ...... 2-4, 2-16, 2-17, 5-20, Permission Output for Trigger 1 Input .................... 3-4
5-22, 5-24, 6-61, 6-62, 6-63, 6-66 Pin Layout ....................................................5-16, 5-19
Importing Settings ................................................... 7-9 Power and ground terminals ................................ 1-11
Input Circuit Diagram .................................. 5-21, 5-26 Power supply LED ................................................ 1-10
Input Signal ............................................................. 4-4 PROFINET Interface ............................................. 5-13
Input/Output Circuit .............................................. 5-26 PROFINET Unit ..................................................... 5-14
Inserting an SD Card .............................................. 7-4
Install ............................................. 2-2, 2-5, 2-6, 2-12
Installing the Illumination Expansion Unit ............... 2-3
R
Reflected illumination ........................................... 2-12
Removing a USB HDD ........................................... 7-7
L Removing an SD Card ........................................... 7-5
Lens ................................................................ 2-7, 4-8 Reset Signal ........................................................... 7-3
Low-angle Illumination .......................................... 2-13 RS-232C Interface .................................................. 5-2
I-2 XG-X SM(Area)-GB

INDEX
RS-232C port ........................................................ 1-10

X
Run Mode ............................................................... 4-3
XG-035C ............................................6-28, 6-50, 6-76
Run Mode Output ................................................... 3-5
XG-035M ...........................................6-28, 6-50, 6-76
RUN/STOP switch ................................................... 7-2
XG-200C ............................................6-29, 6-50, 6-77
XG-200M ...........................................6-29, 6-50, 6-77
S XG-H035C .........................................6-28, 6-51, 6-78
XG-H035M .........................................6-28, 6-51, 6-78
Saving Camera Images ........................................ 7-10
XG-H200C .........................................6-29, 6-51, 6-78
SCREEN button ....................................................... 7-2
XG-H200M .........................................6-29, 6-51, 6-78
Screen capture ....................................................... 7-3
XG-H2100C .......................................6-19, 6-45, 6-71
SD Card .................................................................. 7-4
XG-H2100M .......................................6-19, 6-45, 6-71
SD card slot .......................................................... 1-10
XG-H500C .........................................6-17, 6-52, 6-78
Selector Switch ....................................................... 7-2
XG-H500M .........................................6-17, 6-52, 6-78
Setup Mode ............................................................ 4-3
XG-S035C .........................................6-24, 6-52, 6-79
Specifications ................................. 5-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-6
XG-S035M .........................................6-24, 6-52, 6-79
Spot Illumination ................................................... 2-13
XG-S200C .........................................6-32, 6-53, 6-79
INDEX
Standard System Configuration .............................. 1-2
XG-S200M .........................................6-32, 6-53, 6-79
Status Change Time ............................................... 3-8
XG-X1000/X1002 .........................................6-36, 6-60
Strobe Output ......................................................... 3-6
XG-X1200/X1202 .........................................6-36, 6-60
Supported SD Card Models ................................... 7-4
XG-X1500/X1502 .........................................6-36, 6-60
Supported USB HDD .............................................. 7-6
XG-X2000/X2002 .........................................6-33, 6-60
XG-X2200/X2202 .........................................6-33, 6-60
T XG-X2500/X2502 .........................................6-33, 6-60
Terminal block ............................................ 1-11, 2-16 XG-X2700/X2702 .........................................6-33, 6-59
Terminal Block Interface ......... 5-18, 5-21, 5-23, 5-25 XG-X2800/X2802 .........................................6-33, 6-58
Timing Chart ........................................................... 3-7 XG-X2900/X2902 .........................................6-33, 6-58
Total Status Output ................................................. 3-6
Transmitted illumination ........................................ 2-12
Trigger 1 Input ........................................................ 3-3
TRIGGER button ..................................................... 7-2
U
USB cable ............................................................. 1-10
USB connector ...................................................... 1-10
USB driver ............................................................... 5-5
USB Handheld Controller ..................................... 6-67
USB HDD ................................................................ 7-6
USB HDD connector ............................................. 1-11
USB Interface .......................................................... 5-4
V
VIEW button ............................................................ 7-2
W
Wiring .............................................................. 3-1, 4-4
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 5-6
Working Distance .................................................... 2-7
XG-X SM(Area)-GB I-3

Revision history
Revision history
Date printed Revision number Revision contents

June 2016 Official release
October 2017 2nd edition Ver. 1.2.0000 reflected
March 2018 3rd edition Ver. 1.3.0000 reflected
January 2019 2nd revision 1st edition Ver. 2.0.0000 reflected
April 2019 3rd revision 1st edition Ver. 2.1.0000 reflected
June 2019 3rd revision 2nd edition Addition of descriptions/Correction of errors
December 2019 3rd revision 3rd edition Ver. 2.3.0000 reflected
March 2020 4th revision 1st edition Ver. 2.4.0000 reflected
September 2020 5th revision 1st edition Ver. 2.5.0000 reflected
June 2021 7th revision 1st edition Ver. 2.7.0000 reflected
March 2023 7th revision 2nd edition
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS
(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from
the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used merely to
illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products would necessarily
conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all
shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by
KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any
Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer,
including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification,
misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or
outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it is
Buyer's responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyers intended use. KEYENCE will not be
responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples ("Products/Samples") supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in humans, for
human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise.
Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE assumes no
responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or
damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF
INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR
ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTYS CLAIM FOR DAMAGES
OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or
damage limitations may not apply.
BUYER'S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide such
third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided
to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.
E 1101-3
Copyright (c) 2021 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 16868GB 2033-2 16868GB Printed in Japan

Series: Setup Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Series: Setup Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MXG53GB

Customizable Vision System

Point Indicates additional information on proper operation.

Reference Indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.

This manual and related manuals

XG-X Series System Connection/Preparation for Initial Installation/Information of Product Specifications

Camera External XG-X Series Setup

Inspection program development/Support functions for Inspection program development

Creating the inspection XG-X VisionEditor

Creating the inspection

Creating GUI/Tool simulation

Operation methods of XG-X Series

Communication and control with external equipment

Remote monitoring of operation condition

16868GB XG-X SM(Area)-GB 3

Safety information for XG-X Series

General cautions for the controller

Operating environment and conditions

Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

CE and UKCA Markings

EMC Directive (CE) and Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations (UKCA)

KC mark (Republic of Korea)

Introduction ................................................................. 2 Chapter 4 Checking the Wiring and

Standard Specifications ....................................... 5-18 High-speed 21 megapixel camera

Input Connections ................................................ 5-26 5 megapixel camera (CA-HX500C/HX500M) ...... 6-27

Output Connections ............................................. 5-27 0.31 megapixel camera (XG-035C/035M) /

Optional Devices 2 megapixel camera (XG-200C/200M) /

Cameras (CA-HX500C/HX500M) ........................ 6-48 Camera Cable Extension Repeater (CA-CNX10U)/

Dome Attachment Dedicated for

Documentation for the installation and configuration methods

XG-X SM(Area)-GB 1-1

Standard System Configuration

Example of a standard system setup with one camera

USB Handheld Controller

1-2 XG-X SM(Area)-GB

Example of a standard system setup with four cameras

24V DC power supply

Touch panel LCD monitor

XG-X SM(Area)-GB 1-3

LED light cable

Touch panel LCD monitor

1-4 XG-X SM(Area)-GB

Example of a basic system using LumiTrax mode

• Devices other than the controller are optional (sold separately).

LED light cable

XG-X SM(Area)-GB 1-5

Example of a basic system using LumiTrax mode (CA-DQW40X)

• Devices other than the controller are optional (sold separately).

LED light cable

1-6 XG-X SM(Area)-GB

Example of a basic system using LumiTrax Specular Reflection Mode

• Devices other than the controller are optional (sold separately).

LED light cable

Touch panel High-speed,

XG-X SM(Area)-GB 1-7

Example of a basic system using MultiSpectrum mode

• Devices other than the controller are optional (sold separately).

LED light cable

1-8 XG-X SM(Area)-GB

Example of a basic system using 3D Capture mode/Profile Capture mode

• Devices other than the controller are optional (sold separately).

LED light cable